Configuration Command Reference

Command Hierarchies

Adapter Card Commands

config
    - [no] card slot-number 
        - [no] mda mda-slot
            - access
                - ingress
                    - fabric-policy fabric-policy-id
                    - no fabric-policy
                    - security-queue-policy policy-id
                    - no security-queue-policy 
                    - shaper-policy policy-name 
                    - no shaper-policy policy-name
            - ais-propagation {enable | disable}
            - clock-mode adaptive
            - clock-mode {dcr-acr | differential} [timestamp-freq {19440 | 25000 | 77760 | 103680}]
            - [no] fabric-stats-enabled
            - mda-mode mda-mode 
            - no mda-mode 
            - mda-type mda-type
            - no mda-type
            - network
                - ingress
                    - fabric-policy fabric-policy-id
                    - no fabric-policy
                    - queue-policy name
                    - no queue-policy
                    - security-queue-policy policy-id
                    - no security-queue-policy
                - ring
                    - add-drop-port-queue-policy name
                    - no add-drop-port-queue-policy
                    - qos-policy network-policy-id
                    - no qos-policy
            - poe-power-source {internal | external | none}
            - no poe-power-source
            - ring    (see Ring MAC Operations Commands)
            - [no] shutdown
            - spt    
                - security-aggregate-rate  agg-rate  
                - no security-aggregate-rate    
            - vcb
                - application {broadcast | teleprotection | vcb | vcb-branch-initiate}
            - voice
                - companding-law {a-law | mu-law}
                - signaling-type {type-i | type-ii | type-v}

External Alarm Commands

config
    - external-alarms
        - [no] alarm alarm-id
            - [no] chassis-alarming
            - description description-string
            - no description 
            - [no] log
            - severity {critical | major | minor | warning}
            - [no] shutdown
            - thresholds
                - analog
                    - [no] level {lt | gt} millivolts
            - trigger [any | all] {alarm-input1 | alarm-input2... | alarm-input8}
            - no trigger
        - input alarm-input
            - debounce seconds
            - debounce detect-seconds clear clear-seconds
            - no debounce
            - description description-string
            - no description
            - name name-string
            - no name
            - normally {open | closed|
            - [no] shutdown
        - output alarm-output
            - description description-string
            - no description
            - name name-string
            - no name
            - [no] shutdown

APS Port Commands

config
    - [no] port {aps-id}
        - aps
            - advertise-interval advertise-interval
            - no advertise-interval 
            - hold-time hold-time
            - no hold-time 
            - hold-time-aps ([lsignal-fail sf-time] [lsignal-degrade sd-time]}
            - no hold-time-aps
            - neighbor ip-address
            - no neighbor
            - protect-circuit port-id
            - no protect-circuit
            - [no] rdi-alarms {suppress | circuit} 
            - revert-time minutes
            - no revert-time
            - switching-mode {bi-directional | uni-1plus1}
            - working-circuit port-id
            - no working-circuit
Note: Queue policies for APS are under the APS port hierarchy (port aps-id/sonet-sdh/path/network/queue-policy name), instead of under the physical port, similar to the configuration of regular SONET/SDH ports. See the SONET/SDH Commands hierarchy for more information.

Microwave Link Commands

config
    - [no] port mw-link-id
        - [no] shutdown
        - mw
            - [no] hold-time {[up hold-time-up] [down hold-time-down]}
            - [no] peer-discovery
            - [no] protection
            - radio port-id [create] [main | spare]
            - no radio port-id 
                - database filename
                - no database
                - name name-string
                - no name
                - perfmon [g826] [power] [acm] 
                - no perfmon 
                - rsl-history file-url
                - no rsl-history 
                - [no] standalone 
                - suppress-faults [hber] [rsl-threshold] [rdi] [all]
                - [no] suppress-faults 
                - [no] tx-mute 
            - [no] revert [eps] [rps]

Ethernet Commands

config 
    - [no] port port-id
        - ethernet
            - access 
                - egress 
                    - shaper-policy name 
                    - no shaper-policy
                    - unshaped-sap-cir cir-rate 
                    - no unshaped-sap-cir
            - autonegotiate [limited]
            - no autonegotiate
            - cfm-loopback priority {low | high | dot1p} [match-vlan {vlan-range | none}] 
            - no cfm-loopback 
            - crc-monitor
                - sd-threshold threshold [multiplier multiplier]
                - no sd-threshold
                - sf-threshold threshold [multiplier multiplier]
                - no sf-threshold
                - window-size seconds
                - no window-size
            - dot1q-etype 0x0600 to 0xffff
            - no dot1q-etype
            - dot1x
            - down-when-looped
                - keep-alive timer
                - no keep-alive
                - retry-timeout timer
                - no retry-timeout
                - [no] shutdown
                - [no] use-broadcast-address
            - duplex {full | half}
            - efm-oam
                - [no] accept-remote-loopback
                - hold-time time-value
                - no hold-time
                - [no] ignore-efm-state
                - mode {active | passive}
                - [no] shutdown
                - [no] transmit-interval interval [multiplier multiplier]
                - [no] tunneling
            - egress-rate sub-rate [include-fcs] [allow-eth-bn-rate-changes] [hold-time hold-time]
            - no egress-rate
            - encap-type {dot1q | null | qinq}
            - no encap-type
            - [no] group-encryption
                - encryption-keygroup keygroup-id direction {inbound | outbound}
                - no encryption-keygroup direction {inbound | outbound} 
            - hold-time {[up hold-time-up] [down hold-time-down] [seconds | centiseconds]} 
            - no hold-time
            - ingress-rate ingress-rate cbs {size [bytes | kilobytes] | default}
            - no ingress-rate
                - src-pause
                - no src-pause
            - lacp-tunnel
            - no lacp-tunnel
            - lldp
            - loopback {line | internal} {timer {0 | 30 .. 86400} | persistent} [swap-src-dst-mac] 
            - no loopback
            - mac ieee-address
            - no mac
            - mode {access | network | hybrid}
            - no mode
            - mtu mtu-bytes
            - no mtu
            - network
                - accounting-policy policy-id 
                - [no] accounting-policy 
                - [no] collect-stats 
                - egress 
                    - shaper-policy name
                    - no shaper-policy
                    - unshaped-if-cir cir-rate
                    - no unshaped-if-cir
                - queue-policy name
                - no queue-policy
                - scheduler-mode {16-priority}    (See Note below)
            - phy-tx-clock {auto-pref-master | auto-pref-slave | slave | master} 
            - no phy-tx-clock 
            - poe [plus]
            - no poe 
            - ptp-asymmetry ptp-asymmetry 
            - no ptp-asymmetry 
            - qinq-etype 0x0600 to 0xffff
            - report-alarm [signal-fail] [remote] [local] [no-frame-lock] [high-ber]
            - no report-alarm 
            - speed {10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000}
            - ssm
                - code-type {sonet | sdh}
                - [no] shutdown
                - [no] tx-dus 
            - util-stats-interval seconds
            - [no] vlan-filter filter-id
            - xgig {lan | wan}
            - xor-mode {rj45 | rjp5 | sfp}
Note: For more information about how to configure the scheduler mode on Ethernet ports, see the 7705 SAR Quality of Service Guide.

IEEE 802.1x Ethernet Port Commands

config
    - port port-id
        - ethernet
            - dot1x
                - [no] mac-auth
                - mac-auth-wait seconds
                - no mac-auth-wait
                - max-auth-req max-auth-request
                - no max-auth-req
                - port-control {auto | force-auth | force-unauth}
                - no port-control 
                - quiet-period seconds
                - no quiet-period
                - radius-plcy name
                - no radius-plcy
                - re-auth-period seconds
                - no re-auth-period
                - [no] re-authentication
                - server-timeout seconds
                - no server-timeout
                - supplicant-timeout seconds
                - no supplicant-timeout
                - transmit-period seconds
                - no transmit-period
                - [no] tunneling

Ring Virtual Port Ethernet Commands

config 
    - [no] port port-id
        - ethernet
            - cfm-loopback priority {low | high | dot1p} [match-vlan {vlan-range | none}] 
            - no cfm-loopback 
            - dot1q-etype 0x0600 to 0xffff
            - no dot1q-etype
            - down-when-looped
                - keep-alive timer
                - no keep-alive
                - retry-timeout timer
                - no retry-timeout
                - [no] shutdown
                - [no] use-broadcast-address
            - duplex full 
            - egress-rate sub-rate
            - no egress-rate
            - encap-type {dot1q | null}
            - no encap-type
            - mac ieee-address
            - no mac
            - mode network
            - no mode
            - mtu mtu-bytes
            - no mtu
            - network
                - queue-policy name
                - no queue-policy
                - scheduler-mode 16-priority
            - speed 2500 

Multilink Bundle and IMA Group Commands

config
    - [no] port {bundle-id} 
        - multilink-bundle
            - fragment-threshold fragment-threshold
            - no fragment-threshold
            - ima
                - atm
                    - cell-format cell-format
                    - min-vp-vpi value
                - link-delay {activate | deactivate} milliseconds
                - no link-delay {activate | deactivate}
                - test-pattern-procedure
                    - [no] shutdown
                    - test-link port-id
                    - no test-link
                    - test-pattern pattern
                    - no test-pattern
                - version IMA-version
                - no version
            - [no] member port-id
            - minimum-links minimum-links
            - no minimum-links
            - mlppp 
                - endpoint-discriminator class {ip-address | global-mac-address | null} [discriminator-id discriminator-id]
                - no endpoint-discriminator 
                - [no] magic-number 
                - multiclass count
                - no multiclass
            - mrru mrru
            - no mrru
            - red-differential-delay red-diff-delay [down]
            - no red-differential-delay
            - [no] short-sequence
            - yellow-differential-delay yellow-diff-delay
            - no yellow-differential-delay

Serial Commands

config 
    - [no] port {port-id}
        - serial
            - [no] rs232
                - [no] channel-group channel-group-id
                    - crc {16 | 32}
                    - description description-string
                    - no description 
                    - encap-type cem
                    - no encap-type
                    - idle-payload-fill all-ones 
                    - no idle-payload-fill
                    - mode access 
                    - [no] shutdown
                - character-length {6 | 7 | 8}
                - clock-source {external | slave | dcr-serial}
                - control-lead {input | monitor | output}
                    - input
                        - alb-cts {high | low | end-to-end}
                        - dtr-dsr {high | low}
                        - rdl-ri {high | low}
                        - rts-dcd {high | low | end-to-end}
                    - monitor
                        - alb-cts {on | off | high | low}
                        - dtr-dsr {on | off | high | low}
                        - rdl-ri {on | off | high | low}
                        - rts-dcd {on | off | high | low}
                    - output
                        - cts-rl {high | low | end-to-end}
                        - dcd-rts {high | low | end-to-end}
                        - dsr-dtr {high | low}
                        - ri-rdl {high | low}
                - data-position {F0-B5 | F0-B6}
                - device-gender {dte | dce}
                - device-mode {synchronous | asynchronous}
                - duplex {half | full}
                - hold-time {[up hold-time-up] [down hold-time-down]}
                - no hold-time
                - [no] invert-clock
                - no invert-clock
                - loopback {bidir-b | bidir-e}
                - no loopback
                - mon-clock-deviation {[raise debounce-time-r] [clear debounce-time-c]}
                - no mon-clock-deviation
                - mon-data-inactivity {[raise debounce-time-r] [clear debounce-time-c]}
                - no mon-data-inactivity
                - multi-drop {disabled | slave | master}
                - parity {odd | even | mark | space}
                - no parity
                - [no] report-alarm [hcmOof | hcmRai] [ctrlLeadMon] [monClockDev] [monDataInac]
                - s-bit-signaling {on | off}
                - [no] shutdown
                - socket socket-id
                    - description description-string
                    - no description 
                    - encap-type encap-type
                    - rx 
                        - eop
                            - idle-timeout milliseconds
                            - length bytes
                            - special-char value
                            - no special-char
                        - squelch-delay seconds
                        - no squelch-delay 
                        - squelch-reset
                        - unsquelch-delay seconds
                        - no unsquelch-delay
                - [no] shutdown
                    - tx
                        - inter-session-delay milliseconds
                - speed {600 | 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 8000 | 9600 | 14400 | 16000 | 19200 | 24000 | 32000 | 38400 | 56000 | 57600 | 64k | 115200}
                - stop-bits {1 | 2}
            - [no] rs530
                - [no] channel-group channel-group-id
                    - description description-string
                    - no description 
                    - encap-type cem
                    - no encap-type
                    - idle-payload-fill {all-ones | pattern}
                    - no idle-payload-fill
                    - mode {access | network} 
                    - [no] shutdown
                - character-length {6 | 7 | 8}
                - clock-source {external | slave | dcr-serial} 
                - control-lead {input | monitor | output}
                    - input
                        - dtr-dsr {high | low}
                        - ll-tm {high | low}
                        - rl-cts {high | low | end-to-end}
                        - rts-dcd {high | low | end-to-end}
                    - monitor
                        - dtr-dsr {on | off | high | low}
                        - ll-tm {on | off | high | low}
                        - rl-cts {on | off | high | low}
                        - rts-dcd {on | off | high | low}
                    - output
                        - cts-rl {high | low | end-to-end}
                        - dcd-rts {high | low | end-to-end}
                        - dsr-dtr {high | low}
                        - tm-ll {high | low}
                - data-position {F0-B5 | F0-B6}
                - device-gender {dte | dce}
                - device-mode {synchronous | asynchronous}
                - duplex {half | full}
                - hold-time {[up hold-time-up] [down hold-time-down]}
                - no hold-time
                - [no] invert-clock
                - loopback {bidir-e | bidir-e-signalling}
                - no loopback
                - mon-clock-deviation {[raise debounce-time-r] [clear debounce-time-c]}
                - no mon-clock-deviation
                - mon-data-inactivity {[raise debounce-time-r] [clear debounce-time-c]}
                - no mon-data-inactivity
                - multi-drop {disabled | slave | master}
                - parity {odd | even | mark | space}
                - no parity
                - [no] report-alarm [hcmOof | hcmRai] [ctrlLeadMon] [monClockDev] [monDataInac]
                - s-bit-signaling {on | off}
                - [no] shutdown
                - speed {600 | 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 8000 | 9600 | 14400 | 16000 |19200 | 32000 | 38400 | 56000 | 64k | 128k | 192k | 256k | 288k | 336k | 384k | 512k | 640k | 704k | 768k | 896k | 1024k | 1152k| 1280k | 1344k | 1408k | 1536k | 1664k | 1792k | 1920k | 2048k | 3072k | 4096k | 5120k | 6144k | 7168k | 8192k | 9216k | 10240k | 11264k | 12288k | 13312k | 14336k | 15360k | 16384k}
                - stop-bits {1 | 2}
            - [no] v35
                - [no] channel-group channel-group-id
                    - cisco-hdlc
                        - down-count down-count
                        - no down-count 
                        - keepalive time-interval
                        - no keepalive 
                        - up-count up-count
                        - no up-count
                    - crc {16 | 32}
                    - description description-string
                    - no description 
                    - encap-type {cem | ipcp | frame-relay | hdlc | cisco-hdlc}
                    - no encap-type
                    - frame-relay
                        - lmi-type {ansi | itu | none | rev1}
                        - mode {dce | dte | bidir}
                        - n391dte intervals
                        - no n391dte
                        - n392dce threshold
                        - no n392dce
                        - n392dte threshold
                        - no n392dte
                        - n393dce count
                        - no n393dce
                        - n393dte count
                        - no n393dte
                        - t391dte keepalive
                        - no t391dte
                        - t392dce keepalive
                        - no t392dce
                    - idle-cycle-flag {flags | ones}
                    - no idle-cycle-flag
                    - idle-payload-fill all-ones
                    - no idle-payload-fill
                    - mode access 
                    - mtu mtu-bytes
                    - no mtu
                    - [no] ppp
                        - keepalive time-interval [dropcount drop-count]
                    - [no] shutdown
                - clock-source slave 
                - control-lead {input | output}
                    - input
                        - alb-cts {high | low | end-to-end}
                        - dtr-dsr {high | low}
                        - rts-dcd {high | low | end-to-end}
                    - monitor
                        - alb-cts {on | off | high | low}
                        - dtr-dsr {on | off | high | low}
                        - rts-dcd {on | off | high | low}
                    - output
                        - cts-alb {high | low | end-to-end}
                        - dcd-rts {high | low | end-to-end}
                        - dsr-dtr {high | low}
                - device-gender {dte | dce}
                - device-mode {synchronous}
                - duplex {half | full}
                - hold-time {[up hold-time-up] [down hold-time-down]}
                - no hold-time
                - [no] invert-clock
                - loopback {bidir-b | bidir-e}
                - no loopback
                - multi-drop {disabled | slave | master}
                - mon-clock-deviation {[raise debounce-time-r] [clear debounce-time-c]}
                - no mon-clock-deviation
                - mon-data-inactivity {[raise debounce-time-r] [clear debounce-time-c]}
                - no mon-data-inactivity
                - [no] report-alarm [hcmOof | hcmRai] [ctrlLeadMon] [monClockDev] [monDataInac]
                - [no] shutdown
                - speed {56k | 64k | 128k | 192k | 256k | 384k | 512k | 640k | 768k | 896k | 1024k | 1152k | 1280k | 1344k | 1408k | 1536k | 1664k | 1792k | 1920k | 2048k | 4096k | 5120k | 7168k}
            - [no] x21
                - [no] channel-group channel-group-id
                    - cisco-hdlc
                        - down-count down-count
                        - no down-count 
                        - keepalive time-interval
                        - no keepalive
                        - up-count up-count
                        - no up-count
                    - crc {16 | 32}
                    - description description-string
                    - no description 
                    - encap-type {cem | ipcp | frame-relay | hdlc | cisco-hdlc}
                    - no encap-type
                    - frame-relay
                        - lmi-type {ansi | itu | none | rev1}
                        - mode {dce | dte | bidir}
                        - n391dte intervals
                        - no n391dte
                        - n392dce threshold
                        - no n392dce
                        - n392dte threshold
                        - no n392dte
                        - n393dce count
                        - no n393dce
                        - n393dte count
                        - no n393dte
                        - t391dte keepalive
                        - no t391dte
                        - t392dce keepalive
                        - no t392dce
                    - idle-cycle-flag {flags | ones}
                    - no idle-cycle-flag
                    - idle-payload-fill all-ones
                    - no idle-payload-fill
                    - invert-clock
                    - no invert-clock
                    - mode access 
                    - mtu mtu-bytes
                    - no mtu
                    - [no] ppp
                        - keepalive time-interval [dropcount drop-count]
                    - [no] shutdown
                - character-length {6 | 7 | 8}
                - clock-source slave 
                - control-lead {input | output}
                    - input
                        - c-i {high | low | end-to-end}
                    - monitor
                        - c-i {on | off | high | low}
                    - output
                        - i-c {high | low | end-to-end}
                - data-position {F0-B5 | F0-B6}
                - device-gender {dte | dce}
                - device-mode {synchronous | asynchronous}
                - duplex {half | full}
                - hold-time {[up hold-time-up] [down hold-time-down]}
                - no hold-time
                - invert-clock
                - no invert-clock
                - loopback {bidir-b | bidir-e}
                - no loopback
                - mon-clock-deviation {[raise debounce-time-r] [clear debounce-time-c]}
                - no mon-clock-deviation
                - mon-data-inactivity {[raise debounce-time-r] [clear debounce-time-c]}
                - no mon-data-inactivity
                - parity {odd | even | mark | space}
                - no parity
                - [no] report-alarm [hcmOof | hcmRai] [ctrlLeadMon] [monClockDev] [monDataInac]
                - s-bit-signaling {on | off}
                - [no] shutdown
                - speed {1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 56000 | 64k | 128k | 256k | 384k | 512k | 640k | 768k | 896k | 1024k | 1152k | 1280k | 1408k | 1536k | 1664k | 1792k | 1920k| 2048k}

SONET/SDH Commands

config 
    - [no] port {port-id}
        - sonet-sdh
            - clock-source {loop-timed | node-timed}
            - framing {sonet | sdh}
            - group sonet-sdh-index payload {tu3 | vt2 | vt15}
            - hold-time {[up hold-time-up] [down hold-time-down]}
            - no hold-time
            - loopback {line | internal}
            - no loopback
            - [no] path [sonet-sdh-index]
                - atm
                    - cell-format cell-format
                    - min-vp-vpi value
                - crc {16 | 32}
                - description description-string
                - no description
                - encap-type {atm | ppp-auto}
                - no encap-type
                - mode {access | network}
                - mtu mtu
                - no mtu
                - network
                    - accounting-policy policy-id 
                    - [no] accounting-policy 
                    - [no] collect-stats 
                    - queue-policy name
                    - no queue-policy
                - payload {sts12 | sts3 | tug3 | ds3 | e3 | vt2 | vt15 | ds1 | e1}
                - ppp
                    - keepalive time-interval [dropcount drop-count]
                    - no keepalive
                - [no] report-alarm [pais] [plop] [prdi] [pplm] [prei] [puneq] [plcd] 
                - [no] scramble 
                - [no] shutdown
                - signal-label value
                - no signal-label
                - trace-string [trace-string]
                - no trace-string
            - [no] report-alarm [loc] [lais] [lrdi] [ss1f] [lb2er-sd] [lb2er-sf] [slof] [slos] [lrei]
            - section-trace {increment-z0 | byte value | string string}
            - speed {oc3 | oc12}
            - threshold {ber-sd | ber-sf} rate threshold-rate
            - no threshold {ber-sd | ber-sf}
            - [no] tx-dus

TDM Commands

config 
    - [no] port port-id
        - tdm 
            - buildout {long | short}
            - [no] codir
                - [no] channel-group channel-group-id
                    - description description-string
                    - no description
                    - encap-type cem
                    - mode access
                    - [no] shutdown
                - loopback {internal | line}
                - no loopback
                - report-alarm {ais | los}
                - no report-alarm
                - [no] shutdown
                - [no] timing-8k
            - [no] ds1 ds1-id
            - [no] ds3 [sonet-sdh-index]
            - [no] e1 e1-id
            - [no] e3 [sonet-sdh-index]
            - encoding {b8zs | ami}
            - length {133 | 266 | 399 | 533 | 655}
            - line-impedance {75 | 100 | 120} 
            - [no] tpif
                - [no] channel-group channel-group-id
                    - description description-string
                    - no description 
                    - encap-type cem
                    - mode access
                    - [no] shutdown
                    - timeslots timeslots
                - framing {framed | unframed}
                - no framing 
                - loopback {internal | line}
                - no loopback
                - report-alarm {los | rai}
                - no report-alarm
                - [no] shutdown

DS1 Commands

config 
    - [no] port {port-id | aps-id | lcr-port-id}
        - tdm
            - [no] ds1 ds1-id
                - [no] channel-group channel-group-id
                    - atm
                        - cell-format cell-format
                        - min-vp-vpi value
                    - cisco-hdlc
                        - down-count down-count
                        - no down-count
                        - keepalive time-interval
                        - no keepalive
                        - up-count up-count
                        - no up-count
                    - crc {16 | 32}
                    - description description-string
                    - no description
                    - encap-type {atm | cem | ipcp | ppp-auto | frame-relay | hdlc | cisco-hdlc}
                    - no encap-type
                    - frame-relay
                        - lmi-type {ansi | itu | none | rev1}
                        - mode {dce | dte | bidir}
                        - n391dte intervals
                        - no n391dte
                        - n392dce threshold
                        - no n392dce
                        - n392dte threshold
                        - no n392dte
                        - n393dce count
                        - no n393dce
                        - n393dte count
                        - no n393dte
                        - t391dte keepalive
                        - no t391dte
                        - t392dce keepalive
                        - no t392dce
                    - idle-cycle-flag {flags | ones}
                    - no idle-cycle-flag
                    - idle-payload-fill {all-ones | pattern pattern}
                    - no idle-payload-fill
                    - idle-signal-fill {all-ones | pattern pattern}
                    - no idle-signal-fill
                    - loopback {line | internal}
                    - no loopback
                    - mac ieee-address
                    - no mac
                    - mode {access | network}
                    - no mode
                    - mtu mtu-bytes
                    - no mtu
                    - network
                        - accounting-policy policy-id 
                        - [no] accounting-policy 
                        - [no] collect-stats 
                        - queue-policy name
                        - no queue-policy
                    - [no] ppp
                        - ber-sf-link-down 
                        - no ber-sf-link-down
                        - keepalive time-interval [dropcount drop-count]
                        - no keepalive
                    - [no] scramble
                    - [no] shutdown
                    - signal-mode cas
                    - no signal-mode
                    - timeslots timeslots
                    - no timeslots
                - clock-source {loop-timed | node-timed | adaptive | differential} 
                - framing (DS1) {esf | sf | ds1-unframed}
                - hold-time {[up hold-time-up] [down hold-time-down]}
                - no hold-time
                - loopback (DS1) {line | internal | fdl-ansi | fdl-bellcore | payload-ansi}
                - no loopback (DS1)
                - [no] remote-loop-respond
                - [no] report-alarm {ais | los | oof | rai | looped | ber-sd | ber-sf}
                - [no] shutdown
                - signal-mode cas
                - no signal-mode
                - ssm
                    - [no] shutdown
                    - [no] tx-dus 
                - threshold {ber-sd | ber-sf} rate threshold-rate
                - no threshold {ber-sd | ber-sf}

DS3 Commands

config 
    - [no] port {port-id | aps-id}
        - tdm
            - [no] ds3 [sonet-sdh-index]
                - atm
                    - cell-format cell-format
                    - no cell-format 
                    - mapping direct 
                    - no mapping
                    - min-vp-vpi value
                    - no min-vp-vpi
                - channelized {ds1 | e1}
                - no channelized
                - clock-source {loop-timed | node-timed | differential | free-run} 
                - crc {16 | 32} 
                - description description-string
                - no description
                - encap-type {atm | ppp-auto | frame-relay}
                - no encap-type
                - [no] feac-loop-respond
                - frame-relay
                    - lmi-type {ansi | itu | none | rev1}
                    - mode {dce | dte | bidir}
                    - n391dte intervals
                    - no n391dte
                    - n392dce threshold
                    - no n392dce
                    - n392dte threshold
                    - no n392dte
                    - n393dce count
                    - no n393dce
                    - n393dte count
                    - no n393dte
                    - t391dte keepalive
                    - no t391dte
                    - t392dce keepalive
                    - no t392dce
                - framing (DS3) {c-bit | m23}
                - idle-cycle-flag {flags | ones}
                - no idle-cycle-flag
                - loopback {line | internal | remote}
                - no loopback
                - mac ieee-address
                - no mac
                - mdl {eic | lic | fic | unit | pfi | port | gen} mdl-string
                - [no] mdl
                - [no] mdl-transmit {path | idle-signal | test-signal}
                - mode {access | network}
                - mtu mtu-bytes
                - no mtu
                - network
                    - accounting-policy policy-id 
                    - [no] accounting-policy 
                    - [no] collect-stats 
                    - queue-policy name
                    - no queue-policy
                - ppp
                    - keepalive time-interval [dropcount drop-count]
                    - no keepalive
                - [no] report-alarm {ais | los | oof | rai | looped}
                - [no] shutdown

E1 Commands

config 
    - [no] port {port-id | aps-id | lcr-port-id}
        - tdm
            - [no] e1 e1-id
                - [no] channel-group channel-group-id
                    - atm
                        - cell-format cell-format
                        - min-vp-vpi value
                    - cisco-hdlc
                        - down-count down-count
                        - no down-count
                        - keepalive time-interval
                        - no keepalive
                        - up-count up-count
                        - no up-count
                    - crc {16 | 32}
                    - description description-string
                    - no description
                    - encap-type {atm | cem | ipcp | ppp-auto | frame-relay | hdlc | cisco-hdlc}
                    - no encap-type
                    - frame-relay
                        - lmi-type {ansi | itu | none | rev1}
                        - mode {dce | dte | bidir}
                        - n391dte intervals
                        - no n391dte
                        - n392dce threshold
                        - no n392dce
                        - n392dte threshold
                        - no n392dte
                        - n393dce count
                        - no n393dce
                        - n393dte count
                        - no n393dte
                        - t391dte keepalive
                        - no t391dte
                        - t392dce keepalive
                        - no t392dce
                    - idle-cycle-flag {flags | ones}
                    - no idle-cycle-flag
                    - idle-payload-fill {all-ones | pattern pattern}
                    - no idle-payload-fill
                    - idle-signal-fill {all-ones | pattern pattern}
                    - no idle-signal-fill
                    - loopback {line | internal}
                    - no loopback
                    - mac ieee-address
                    - no mac
                    - mode {access | network}
                    - no mode
                    - mtu mtu-bytes
                    - no mtu
                    - network
                        - accounting-policy policy-id 
                        - [no] accounting-policy 
                        - [no] collect-stats 
                        - queue-policy name
                        - no queue-policy
                    - [no] ppp
                        - ber-sf-link-down 
                        - no ber-sf-link-down
                        - keepalive time-interval [dropcount drop-count]
                        - no keepalive
                    - [no] scramble
                    - [no] shutdown
                    - signal-mode cas
                    - no signal-mode
                    - timeslots timeslots
                    - no timeslots
                - clock-source {loop-timed | node-timed | adaptive | differential}
                - framing (E1) {no-crc-g704 | g704 | e1-unframed}
                - hold-time {[up hold-time-up] [down hold-time-down]}
                - no hold-time
                - loopback (E1) {line | internal}
                - no loopback (E1)
                - [no] report-alarm {ais | los | oof | rai | looped | ber-sd | ber-sf}
                - [no] shutdown
                - signal-mode cas
                - no signal-mode
                - ssm
                    - [no] shutdown
                    - ssm-bit sa-bit
                    - no ssm-bit
                    - [no] tx-dus 
                - threshold {ber-sd | ber-sf} rate threshold-rate
                - no threshold {ber-sd | ber-sf}

E3 Commands

config
    - [no] port {port-id}
        - tdm
            - [no] e3 [sonet-sdh-index]
                - atm
                    - cell-format cell-format
                    - no cell-format 
                    - min-vp-vpi value
                    - no min-vp-vpi
                - clock-source {loop-timed | node-timed | differential | free-run}
                - crc {16 | 32} 
                - description description-string
                - no description
                - encap-type {atm | cem | ppp-auto | frame-relay}|
                - no encap-type
                - [no] feac-loop-respond
                - frame-relay
                    - lmi-type {ansi | itu | none | rev1}
                    - mode {dce | dte | bidir}
                    - n391dte intervals
                    - no n391dte
                    - n392dce threshold
                    - no n392dce
                    - n392dte threshold
                    - no n392dte
                    - n393dce count
                    - no n393dce
                    - n393dte count
                    - no n393dte
                    - t391dte keepalive
                    - no t391dte
                    - t392dce keepalive
                    - no t392dce
                - framing (E3) g751
                - idle-cycle-flag {flags | ones}
                - no idle-cycle-flag
                - loopback {line | internal | remote}
                - no loopback
                - mode {network}
                - mtu mtu-bytes
                - no mtu
                - network
                    - accounting-policy policy-id 
                    - [no] accounting-policy 
                    - [no] collect-stats 
                    - queue-policy name
                    - no queue-policy
                - ppp
                    - keepalive time-interval [dropcount drop-count]
                    - no keepalive
                - [no] report-alarm {ais | los | oof | rai | looped}
                - [no] shutdown

Voice Commands

config
    - [no] port port-id
        - voice
            - audio-wires {two-wires | four-wires}
            - [no] em
                - [no] channel-group channel-group-id
                    - description description-string
                    - no description
                    - encap-type cem
                    - no encap-type 
                    - mode access
                    - [no] shutdown
                - fault-signaling {idle | seized}
                - idle-code abcd-code
                - no idle-code
                - loopback {internal-analog | internal-digital}
                - no loopback
                - seized-code abcd-code
                - signaling-lead
                    - e {high | low | end-to-end}
                    - m {high | low | end-to-end}
                - signaling-mode {em | transmission-only}
                - [no] shutdown
            - [no] fxo
                - [no] channel-group channel-group-id
                    - description description-string
                    - no description
                    - encap-type cem
                    - no encap-type 
                    - mode access
                    - [no] shutdown
                - fault-signaling {idle | seized}
                - loopback internal-digital
                - no loopback
                - [no] shutdown
            - [no] fxs
                - [no] channel-group channel-group-id
                    - description description-string
                    - no description
                    - encap-type cem
                    - no encap-type 
                    - mode access
                    - [no] shutdown
                - fault-signaling {idle | seized}
                - loopback internal-digital
                - no loopback
                - [no] shutdown
            - line-balance {nominal | 800}
            - ring-generation {16 | 20 | 25}
            - no ring-generation
            - signaling-type {3600plar | 1511plar | 3600ls | 1511profile1 | 3600re | 1511sn137}
            - tlp-rx decibels
            - tlp-tx decibels

LAG Commands

config
    - [no] lag [lag-id]
        - access
            - adapt-qos {link | distribute}
        - bfd
            - family ipv4
                - [no] bfd-on-distributing-only
                - local-ip-address ip-address
                - no local-ip-address
                - max-admin-down-time [[down-interval] | infinite]
                - no max-admin-down-time
                - max-setup-time [[up-interval] | infinite]
                - no max-setup-time
                - multiplier multiplier
                - no multiplier
                - receive-interval receive-interval
                - no receive-interval
                - remote-ip-address ip-address
                - no remote-ip-address
                - [no] shutdown
                - transmit-interval transmit-interval
                - no transmit-interval
        - description description-string
        - no description
        - [no] dynamic-cost
        - encap-type {dot1q | null | qinq}
        - no encap-type
        - hold-time down hold-down-time
        - no hold-time
        - lacp [mode] [administrative-key admin-key] [system-id system-id] [system-priority priority]
        - no lacp
        - lacp-xmit-interval {slow | fast}
        - no lacp-xmit-interval
        - [no] lacp-xmit-stdby
        - mac ieee-address
        - no mac
        - mode {access | network | hybrid}
        - no mode
        - port port-id [port-id] [priority priority] [sub-group sub-group-id]
        - no port port-id
        - port-threshold value [action {dynamic-cost | down}]
        - no port-threshold
        - selection-criteria [best-port | highest-count | highest-weight] [slave-to-partner] [subgroup-hold-time hold-time]
        - no selection-criteria
        - [no] shutdown
        - standby-signaling [lacp | power-off]
        - no standby-signaling

SCADA Commands

config
    - scada bridge-id
        - [no] branch branch-id
            - description description-string
            - no description
            - gain
                - input decibels
                - output decibels
                - [no] sidetone  (see the Note below)
            - [no] shutdown
            - [no] squelch
        - description description-string
        - no description
        - mddb
            - force-active master branch-id
            - redundant-mode redundant-mode
            - [no] report-alarm [hcmOof] [hcmRai] 
            - speed {600 | 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 56000}
            - squelch timeout timeout
            - squelch reset
            - no squelch
            - squelch-recovery [mode] [time time]
        - pcm
            - force-active master branch-id
            - redundant-mode redundant-mode
            - squelch timeout timeout
            - squelch reset
            - no squelch
            - squelch-recovery [mode] [time time]
        - [no] shutdown
        - vcb
            - idle-code abcd-code
            - no idle-code
            - seized-code abcd-code
            - no seized-code
Note: The sidetone command is not supported in this release.

Command Descriptions

Generic Commands

description

Syntax

description description-string

no description

Context

config>external-alarms>alarm

config>external-alarms>input

config>external-alarms>output

config>lcr

config>port

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>ds3

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e3

config>port>tdm>codir>channel-group

config>port>tdm>tpif>channel-group

config>port>voice>fxo>channel-group

config>port>voice>fxs>channel-group

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

config>port>serial>rs232>channel-group

config>port>serial>rs232>socket

config>port>serial>rs530>channel-group

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group

config>port>voice>em>channel-group

config>lag

config>scada

config>scada>branch

Description

This command creates a text description for a configuration context to help identify the content in the configuration file.

The no form of this command removes any description string from the context. For the serial context, the no form of this command restores the default value.

Default

‟DS0GRP” (for the serial context and the voice context)

‟Discrete Digital Input” for digital input (for Auxiliary Alarm card or chassis alarm inputs), ‟Analog Input” for analog input, and ‟Digital Output Relay” for output (for Auxiliary Alarm card)

n/a for others

Parameters
description-string

description character string. Allowed values are any string up to 80 or 160 characters long (depending on the command) composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (such as #, $, or spaces), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

shutdown

Syntax

[no] shutdown

Context

config>card

config>card>mda

config>external-alarms>alarm

config>external-alarms>input

config>external-alarms>output

config>port

config>port>ethernet>down-when-looped

config>port>ethernet>efm-oam

config>port>ethernet>ssm

config>port>mw-link

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>v35

config>port>serial>x21

config>port>serial>rs232>channel-group

config>port>serial>rs232>socket

config>port>serial>rs530>channel-group

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

config>port>tdm>ds1

config>port>tdm>ds1>ssm

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>ds3

config>port>tdm>e1

config>port>tdm>e1>ssm

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e3

config>port>tdm>codir

config>port>tdm>codir>channel-group

config>port>tdm>tpif

config>port>tdm>tpif>channel-group

config>port>voice>fxo

config>port>voice>fxs

config>port>voice>fxo>channel-group

config>port>voice>fxs>channel-group

config>port>voice>em

config>port>voice>em>channel-group

config>lag

config>scada

config>scada>branch

Description

This command administratively disables an entity. When disabled, an entity does not change, reset, or remove any configuration settings or statistics.

The operational state of the entity is disabled as well as the operational state of any entities contained within. Many objects must be shut down before they can be deleted.

When used with the ethernet>efm-oam command, shutdown enables tunneling on the port (see tunneling), and no shutdown enables Ethernet EFM OAM 802.3ah.

The no form of this command administratively enables an entity.

Note: The config>port>shutdown command does not remove power on ports that are Power over Ethernet (PoE/PoE+) capable. You must use the config>port>ethernet>no poecommand to turn the power off; see poe for more information.
Default

card – no shutdown

mda – no shutdown

port – shutdown

scada – shutdown

scada>branch – no shutdown

input – no shutdown (for Auxiliary Alarm card and chassis alarm inputs)

alarm – shutdown (for Auxiliary Alarm card)

output – shutdown (for Auxiliary Alarm card)

lag – shutdown

Card Commands

card

Syntax

[no] card slot-number

Context

config

Description

This mandatory command is the first step in activating the IOM software: designating it a slot position in the chassis. On the 7705 SAR, the slot number is always 1. The IOM software must be activated before the adapter cards and ports can be configured. The no form of this command removes the card from the configuration. All associated ports, services, and adapter cards must be shut down.

Default

n/a

Parameters
slot-number

the slot number of the card in the chassis

Values

1

card-type

Syntax

card-type card-type

no card-type

Context

config>card

Description

This mandatory command is the second step in activating the IOM software: designating the card type. The card type can be preprovisioned, meaning that the card does not need to be installed in the chassis. On the 7705 SAR, the card type is always iom-sar.

A card must be provisioned (configured) before an adapter card or port can be configured.

A card can only be provisioned in a slot that is vacant, which means that no other card can be provisioned for that particular slot. To reconfigure a slot position, use the no form of this command to remove the current information. Port and adapter card information must be shut down.

A card can only be provisioned in a slot if the card type is allowed in the slot. An error message is generated if an attempt is made to provision a card type that is not allowed.

The no form of this command removes the card from the configuration. This operation requires that the card be administratively shut down. All dependencies to ports on this card must be shut down and removed from the configuration before issuing the no card-type command.

Default

n/a

Parameters
card-type

the type of card to be configured and installed in the slot

Values

iom-sar

Adapter Card Commands

mda

Syntax

[no] mda mda-slot

Context

config>card

Description

This mandatory command enables access to a card’s MDA CLI context to configure adapter cards.

Default

n/a

Parameters
mda-slot

the adapter card or module slot number to be configured

ais-propagation

Syntax

ais-propagation {enable | disable}

Context

config>card>mda

Description

This command enables the 7705 SAR to interoperate with SDH networks that use subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). When ais-propagation is enabled, the 7705 SAR can use SDH signaling to make pseudowire switching decisions on Cpipes configured for redundancy.

For more information about 7705 SAR interoperation with SDH SNCP, see the 7705 SAR Services Guide, ‟AIS Fault Propagation”.

Default

n/a

clock-mode

Syntax

clock-mode adaptive

clock-mode {dcr-acr | differential}[timestamp-freq {19440 | 25000 | 77760 | 103680}]

Context

config>card>mda

Description

This command defines the clocking mode and the associated timestamp frequency (if differential or dcr-acr clocking mode is configured).

All clock modes are supported on the following:

  • 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 7705 SAR-A (variant with T1/E1 ports)

  • 7705 SAR-M (variants with T1/E1 ports)

  • 7705 SAR-X

  • T1/E1 ports on the 4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module (the clock frequency value configured for dcr-acr clock mode or differential clock mode on one module takes effect on both modules installed in the 7705 SAR-H)

Only differential mode is supported on the following cards:

  • 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card (DS1/E1 channels)

  • 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card (clear channel DS3/E3 ports and DS1/E1 channels on channelized DS3 ports (E3 ports cannot be channelized)); differential mode on DS1/E1 channels is supported only on the first three ports of the card

Default

adaptive (if no clocking mode is configured)

differential (for 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card and 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card)

If differential or dcr-acr clocking mode is configured on the 7705 SAR-M, 7705 SAR-A, 7705 SAR-X, or 4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module, the default timestamp frequency is 103680.

If differential or dcr-acr clocking mode is configured on the 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card or the 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card, the default timestamp frequency is 77760.

For the 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card and the 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card, the default timestamp frequency is 77760.

Parameters
adaptive

enables adaptive clock recovery

dcr-acr

enables DCR and ACR on different ports of the same card

differential

enables differential clock recovery

timestamp-freq

sets the optional timestamp frequency

19440

sets the timestamp frequency to 19440 Hz (19.44 MHz) for Y.1413 compliance

25000

sets the timestamp frequency to 25000 Hz (25 MHz) for Ethernet-based systems

77760

sets the timestamp frequency to 77760 Hz (77.76 MHz) for interoperation with SONET/SDN-based systems such as TSS-5

103680

sets the timestamp frequency to 103680 Hz (103.68 MHz), recommended for any operation over 100 MHz

Note: The 25000 and 103680 options are not supported on the 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card or the 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card. The 19440, 25000, and 103680 options are not supported on the 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card or the 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card.

fabric-stats-enabled

Syntax

[no] fabric-stats-enabled

Context

config>card>mda

Description

This command enables the fabric port statistics counter to count egress traffic toward a specified adapter card. The CSM allows the collection of fabric statistics from only one fabric port at any specific time. To change the port statistics counter to a different adapter card, turn off statistics collection on the assigned adapter card by using no fabric-stats-enabled and then enabling statistics collection on another adapter card.

mda-mode

Syntax

mda-mode mda-mode

no mda-mode

Context

config>card>mda

Description

This command configures the set of software services that are enabled for a specific adapter card.

The cem-atm-ppp and cem-fr-hdlc-ppp parameter values are used to configure the appropriate encapsulation methods that are required to support pseudowire services. These values apply to the following adapter cards:

  • 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card

The card-level encapsulation capabilities must be configured before the encap-type parameter is configured at the port level.

Thex10-1gb-sfp and x1-10gb-sf+ parameter values are used for the 10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card to define whether the card operates in 10-port 1GigE mode or 1-port 10GigE mode.

The p4-oc3 and p1-oc12 parameter values are used for the 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card to define whether the card operates in 4-port OC3/STM1 mode or 1-port OC12/STM4 mode.

The mddb, pcm, and vcb parameter values are used for the Integrated Services card to define which SCADA application is active on the card.

The no form of this command sets the mda-mode back to the card’s default mode. All service and port/channel configurations associated with the adapter card must be removed before the mda-mode can be changed. On the 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card, changing the mode causes the adapter card to reset.

Default

x1-10gb-sf+ (for the 10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card)

cem-atm-ppp (for the T1/E1 ASAP adapter cards and 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card)

p4-oc3 (for the 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card)

mddb (for the Integrated Services card)

Parameters
mda-mode

the encapsulation mode for the adapter card to be provisioned

Values

cem-atm-ppp, cem-fr-hdlc-ppp, x10-1gb-sfp, x1-10gb-sf+, p4-oc3, p1-oc12, mddb, pcm, vcb

mda-type

Syntax

mda-type mda-type

no mda-type

Context

config>card>mda

Description

This mandatory command provisions a specific adapter card or module type to the device configuration for the slot. The adapter card or module can be preprovisioned, but it must be provisioned before ports can be configured. Ports can be configured after the adapter card or module is properly provisioned.

A maximum of 6 adapter cards can be installed in a 7705 SAR-8 Shelf V2 chassis, and a maximum of 12 adapter cards and 4 XMDA adapter cards can be installed in a 7705 SAR-18 chassis. One module can be installed in a 7705 SAR-M chassis. A maximum of two modules can be installed in a 7705 SAR-H chassis. Only one adapter card or module can be provisioned per MDA or module slot. To modify an MDA or module slot, shut down all port associations.

A medium severity alarm is generated if an adapter card or module is inserted that does not match the adapter card or module type configured for the slot. This alarm is cleared when the correct adapter card or module is inserted or the configuration is modified. A high severity alarm is raised if an administratively enabled adapter card or module is removed from the chassis. This alarm is cleared if either the correct adapter card or module type is inserted or the configuration is modified. A low severity trap is issued if an administratively disabled adapter card or module is removed.

An alarm is raised if partial or complete adapter card or module failure is detected. The alarm is cleared when the error condition ceases.

The no form of this command deletes the adapter card or module from the configuration. The adapter card or module must be administratively shut down before it can be deleted from the configuration. Before an adapter card or module can be shut down, all port associations with this adapter card or module, for example SAPs and IP interfaces, must be shut down first.

Default

n/a

Parameters
mda-type

the type of adapter card to be provisioned

Values

For the 7705 SAR-8 Shelf V2

a16-chds1v2

16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

a32-chds1v2

32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

a12-sdiv2

12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 2

a12-sdiv3

12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3

a6-eth-10G

6-port Ethernet 10Gbps Adapter card

a6-eth-10G-e

6-port Ethernet 10Gbps Adapter card-E

a8-1gb-sfp

8-port Gigabit Ethernet Adapter card, version 1

a8-1gb-v2-sfp

8-port Gigabit Ethernet Adapter card, version 2

a8-1gb-v3-sfp

8-port Gigabit Ethernet Adapter card, version 3

a6-em

6-port E&M Adapter card

a4-oc3

4-port OC3/STM1 Clear Channel Adapter card

a4-chds3

4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card, version 1

a4-chds3v2

4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card, version 2

a2-choc3

2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

a4-choc3/12

4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card

a2-10gb-xfp

2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card

aux-alarm

Auxiliary Alarm card

mw-pic-2

Power Injector card

a8-pmc

Packet Microwave Adapter card

a8-vt

8-port Voice & Teleprotection card

a8-c3794

8-port C37.94 Teleprotection card

a8-fxo

8-port FXO Adapter card

a6-fxs

6-port FXS Adapter card

oadm-cwdm-1ch

CWDM OADM Adapter card (1-channel)

oadm-cwdm-2ch

CWDM OADM Adapter card (2-channel)

oadm-cwdm-4ch

CWDM OADM Adapter card (4-channel)

oadm-cwdm-8ch

CWDM OADM Adapter card (8-channel)

isc

Integrated Services card

a1-gnss

GNSS Receiver card

For the 7705 SAR-18

a16-chds1v2

16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

a32-chds1v2

32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

a12-sdiv2

12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 2

a12-sdiv3

12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3

a6-eth-10G

6-port Ethernet 10Gbps Adapter card

a6-eth-10G-e

6-port Ethernet 10Gbps Adapter card-E

a8-1gb-sfp

8-port Gigabit Ethernet Adapter card, version 1

a8-1gb-v2-sfp

8-port Gigabit Ethernet Adapter card, version 2

a8-1gb-v3-sfp

8-port Gigabit Ethernet Adapter card, version 3

x-10GigE

10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card, version 1

x-10GigE-v2

10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card, version 2

a6-em

6-port E&M Adapter card

a4-chds3

4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card, version 1

a4-chds3v2

4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card, version 2

a4-oc3

4-port OC3/STM1 Clear Channel Adapter card

a2-choc3

2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

a4-choc3/12

4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card

a2-10gb-xfp

2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card

aux-alarm

Auxiliary Alarm card

mw-pic-2

Power Injector card

a8-pmc

Packet Microwave Adapter card

a8-vt

8-port Voice & Teleprotection card

a8-c3794

8-port C37.94 Teleprotection card

a8-fxo

8-port FXO Adapter card

a6-fxs

6-port FXS Adapter card

oadm-cwdm-1ch

CWDM OADM Adapter card (1-channel)

oadm-cwdm-2ch

CWDM OADM Adapter card (2-channel)

oadm-cwdm-4ch

CWDM OADM Adapter card (4-channel)

oadm-cwdm-8ch

CWDM OADM Adapter card (8-channel)

isc

Integrated Services card

a1-gnss

GNSS Receiver card

For the 7705 SAR-M

oadm-cwdm-1ch

CWDM OADM module (1-channel)

p2-10gb-xfp

2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module

p6-eth

6-port SAR-M Ethernet module

For the 7705 SAR-H

p4-combo

4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module

p1-gps

GPS Receiver module

p4-eth

4-port SAR-H Fast Ethernet module

poe-power-source

Syntax

poe-power-source {internal | external | none}

no poe-power-source

Context

config>card>mda

Description

This command specifies whether the internal system-level PoE power supply or an external PoE power supply is used to power the PoE-capable ports on a 7705 SAR chassis.

When the 7705 SAR-H is configured for the internal power supply, standard 15 W PoE can be enabled only on ports 5 and 6. Port 5 can also support 34 W PoE+, but in that case, port 6 cannot support PoE. When configured for the external PoE power supply, all four PoE-capable ports support a combination of standard 15 W PoE and 34 W PoE+, with a maximum power delivery of 83 W among all PoE-enabled ports. See the 7705 SAR-H Chassis Installation Guide, ‟Ethernet Ports”, for information about supported combinations and restrictions.

The following chassis types only support the internal system-level PoE power supply:

  • 7705 SAR-Hc

  • 7705 SAR-Wx

The no form of this command disables the PoE power supply on the node.

Default

internal

Parameters
internal

specifies that the internal PoE power source be used for the PoE-capable ports

external

specifies that an external PoE power source be used for the PoE-capable ports

none

specifies that no internal or external PoE power source is used

vcb

Syntax

vcb

Context

config>card>mda

Description

This command enables the context to configure voice conference bridge (VCB) parameters on the Integrated Services card.

Default

n/a

application

Syntax

application {broadcast | teleprotection | vcb | vcb-branch-initiate}

Context

config>card>mda>vcb

Description

This command specifies the operating mode for the VCB application. The mode is set at the card level and applies to all bridges configured on the card.

Default

vcb

Parameters
broadcast

only one branch on the bridge (fixed as branch 1) has control of the bridge to transmit, and all other branches are in listen-only mode

teleprotection

each teleprotection relay transmits state information on discrete frequencies so that each relay can both hear what the other relays are transmitting as well as transmit its own information to the other relays

vcb

one branch talks and all other branches on the bridge can hear

vcb-branch-initiate

branches on the bridge are only enabled (unmuted) when the attached base station signals its presence by grounding the M-lead on the interface connected to the bridge. Upon receiving the grounded M-lead via T1/E1 ABCD bits or TDM PW signaling, the bridge unmutes the associated branch. When the ground is removed, the branch is muted again.

voice

Syntax

voice

Context

config>card>mda

Description

This command enables the context to configure voice parameters on the 6-port E&M Adapter card, 8-port Voice & Teleprotection card, 8-port FXO Adapter card, 6-port FXS Adapter card, and Integrated Services card (when it is configured for VCB with the mda-mode command).

Default

n/a

companding-law

Syntax

companding-law {a-law | mu-law}

Context

config>card>mda>voice

Description

This command specifies the companding law to be used on the 6-port E&M Adapter card, 8-port Voice & Teleprotection card, 8-port FXO Adapter card, 6-port FXS Adapter card, and Integrated Services card (for VCB).

To change this parameter, all ports associated with the card must be in shutdown mode and no channels can be defined on the card. A change in the companding law results in a corresponding change to the signaling-type default. The signaling-type applies only to the 6-port E&M Adapter card.

Default

mu-law

Parameters
a-law

A-Law companding

mu-law

Mu-Law companding

signaling-type

Syntax

signaling-type {type-i | type-ii | type-v}

Context

config>card>mda>voice

Description

This command specifies the signaling type to be used on the 6-port E&M Adapter card.

To change the signaling type, all ports associated with the 6-port E&M Adapter card must be in shutdown mode and no channels can be defined on the card.

The signaling type is selectable on a per-card basis. When either A-Law or Mu-Law companding is configured, Type I, Type II, or Type V signaling can be selected. However, the only supported configurations are both ends of the connection operating in the same mode (for example, Type I to Type I) or one end operating in Type I mode and the other in Type V mode.

Default

type-i (for Mu-Law companding)

type-v (for A-Law companding)

Parameters
type-i

Type I signaling

type-ii

Type II signaling

type-v

Type V signaling

Interface QoS Commands

access

Syntax

access

Context

config>card>mda

Description

This command enables the access context to configure QoS policy parameters for the specified adapter card.

network

Syntax

network

Context

config>card>mda

Description

This command enables the network context to configure QoS policy parameters for the specified adapter card.

ingress

Syntax

ingress

Context

config>card>mda>access

config>card>mda>network

Description

This command enables the context to configure the QoS policy parameters for ingress traffic, in either an access or network context, for the specified adapter card.

fabric-policy

Syntax

fabric-policy fabric-policy-id

no fabric-policy

Context

config>card>mda>access>ingress

config>card>mda>network>ingress

Description

This command configures (applies) the ingress fabric policy, in either an access or network context, for the specified adapter card.

Fabric profiles do not apply to the Auxiliary Alarm card.

The no form of this command resets the fabric-policy-id to the default value.

Default

1

Parameters
fabric-policy-id

an existing fabric policy ID

Values

1 to 256

queue-policy

Syntax

queue-policy name

no queue-policy

Context

config>card>mda>network>ingress

Description

This command specifies the network ingress queue policy that defines queue parameters such as CBS, high-priority-only burst size, MBS, CIR, and PIR rates, as well as forwarding class-to-queue mappings. The network queue policy is defined in the config>qos>network-queue context. Refer to the 7705 SAR Quality of Service Guide, ‟Network Queue QoS Policies”, for more information.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

‟default”

Parameters
name

specifies an existing network queue policy name

security-queue-policy

Syntax

security-queue-policy policy-id

no security-queue-policy

Context

config>card>mda>access>ingress

config>card>mda>network>ingress

Description

This command applies an existing security queue policy, in either an access or network context, to the specified adapter card.

The no form of this command sets the policy-id back to the default.

Default

1

Parameters
policy-id

specifies an existing security queue policy ID

Values

1 to 65535

shaper-policy

Syntax

shaper-policy policy-name

no shaper-policy policy-name

Context

config>card>mda>access>ingress

Description

This command enables the context to assign a shaper policy to an Ethernet MDA.

For access ingress per-customer aggregate shaping, the shaper policy is assigned to an Ethernet MDA and SAPs on that Ethernet MDA must be bound to a shaper group within the shaper policy bound to that Ethernet MDA.

The default shaper policy cannot be deleted. Shaper Policy Defaults displays the default shaper policy parameters.

Table 1. Shaper Policy Defaults

Field

Default

description

‟Default Shaper QoS policy.”

shaper-group

‟default”

    description

‟Default Shaper Group.”

    pir-rate

max

    cir-rate

0

The no form of this command removes the configured shaper-policy.

Default

shaper-policy ‟default”

Parameters
policy-name

the name of the shaper policy. To access the default shaper policy, enter ‟default”.

Values

Valid names consist of any string up to 32 characters long composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters.

If the string contains special characters (such as #, $, or spaces), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

create

keyword used to create a shaper policy

ring

Syntax

ring

Context

config>card>mda>network

Description

This command specifies the QoS policy parameters for ring traffic in a network, for the 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card or 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module.

add-drop-port-queue-policy

Syntax

add-drop-port-queue-policy name

no add-drop-port-queue-policy

Context

config>card>mda>network>ring

Description

This command specifies the network queue policy to be applied to the add/drop port on the bridging domain side of a ring adapter card. The network queue policy is defined in the config>qos>network-queue context. Refer to the 7705 SAR Quality of Service Guide, ‟Network Queue QoS Policies”, for more information.

The ring ports and the add/drop port cannot use the same non-default network queue policy that is being used by the v-port and any other port on other cards.

Default

no add-drop-port-queue-policy

Parameters
name

specifies an existing network queue policy

qos-policy

Syntax

qos-policy network-policy-id

no qos-policy

Context

config>card>mda>network>ring

Description

This command specifies the network QoS policy for the ring. Only a ring type network QoS policy can be assigned to a port on the bridging domain side of a ring adapter card.

Default

no qos-policy

Parameters
network-policy-id

specifies the network QoS policy for the ring ports and the add/drop port on a ring adapter card

spt

Syntax

spt

Context

config>card>mda

config>system

Description

This command enables the context for configuring SPT (self-processed traffic) parameters. The config>card>mda context is used for the 7705 SAR-8 Shelf V2, 7705 SAR-18, and 7705 SAR-X. The config>system context is used for the 7705 SAR-Hc, 7705 SAR-H, and 7705 SAR-Wx.

Default

n/a

security-aggregate-rate

Syntax

security-aggregate-rate agg-rate

no security-aggregate-rate

Context

config>card>mda>spt

config>system>spt

Description

This command configures the fabric aggregate rate for security queues on the datapath. The command is configured in the config>card>mda>spt context for the 7705 SAR-8 Shelf V2, 7705 SAR-18, and 7705 SAR-X, and in the config>system>spt context for the 7705 SAR-Hc, 7705 SAR-H, and 7705 SAR-Wx.

Parameters
agg-rate

specifies the aggregate rate for security queues, in kilobits per second

Values

1 to 10000000 | maximum

Default

50000

External Alarm Commands

external-alarms

Syntax

external-alarms

Context

config

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure external alarm attributes on 7705 SAR Ethernet ports (supported on all platforms with Ethernet ports), on the Auxiliary Alarm card, and on the four alarm inputs on the fan module (for the 7705 SAR-8 Shelf V2), alarm connector (for the 7705 SAR-M, 7705 SAR-H, 7705 SAR-Hc, 7705 SAR-Wx, and 7705 SAR-X), and alarm module (for the 7705 SAR-18).

When configuring custom alarms for an Ethernet port, the port must be configured for 100Base-Tx operation with autonegotiation disabled.

alarm

Syntax

[no] alarm alarm-id

Context

config>external-alarms

Description

This command creates or removes alarms.

The no form of this command disables the alarm attributes for the specified alarm. The alarm must be in the shutdown state before the no form of the command can be performed.

Default

n/a

Parameters
alarm-id

specifies the alarm identifier

Values

1 to 2147483647

chassis-alarming

Syntax

[no] chassis-alarming

Context

config>external-alarms>alarm

Description

This command generates output to chassis alarm relays and LEDs for the specified alarm.

The no form of this command disables the generation of output to chassis alarm relays and LEDs.

Default

chassis-alarming

log

Syntax

[no] log

Context

config>external-alarms>alarm

Description

This command generates raise/clear log events for the specified alarm and controls SNMP trap generation for the raise/clear log events.

The no form of this command disables the generation of raise/clear log events.

Default

log

severity

Syntax

severity {critical | major | minor | warning}

Context

config>external-alarms>alarm

Description

This command configures the severity level for the specified alarm.

The alarm must be disabled before the severity level can be modified.

If the alarm generates raise/clear log events and SNMP traps (enabled by the log command), the severity of the raise log events and SNMP traps is controlled by this configuration. The severity level of the clear log events and SNMP traps is warning.

If the alarm generates output to chassis alarm relays and LEDs (enabled by the chassis-alarming command), the severity level of the alarm output is controlled by this configuration. For chassis relay alarms, only the critical, major and minor levels of severity apply. (There are three LEDs that represent each of them.)

Default

major

Parameters
critical

specifies a critical alarm

major

specifies a major alarm

minor

specifies a minor alarm

warning

specifies a warning (not applicable for chassis relay alarms)

thresholds

Syntax

thresholds

Context

config>external-alarms>alarm

Description

This command enables the context to configure the thresholds for the specified alarm.

Default

n/a

analog

Syntax

analog

Context

config>external-alarms>alarm>thresholds

Description

This command enables the context to configure analog trigger thresholds for the specified alarm.

Default

n/a

level

Syntax

[no] level {lt | gt} millivolts

Context

config>external-alarms>alarm>thresholds>analog

Description

This command configures the analog voltage level thresholds for the specified alarm.

The analog input level threshold cannot be changed from no level when there are no analog inputs configured as triggers. When all analog inputs are removed from the trigger list, the level is automatically changed to no level. The analog input level threshold cannot be changed to no level when there is analog input in the trigger list. When the first analog input is added to the alarm trigger, the level is automatically changed to gt 0.

The no form of this command removes the analog voltage level threshold.

Default

no level

Parameters
lt

specifies a less-than value

gt

specifies a greater-than value

millivolts

specifies the voltage level in millivolts

Values

0 to 75000

trigger

Syntax

trigger [any | all] {alarm-input1 | alarm-input2... | alarm-input8}

no trigger

Context

config>external-alarms>alarm

Description

This command configures the inputs that will trigger the alarm. An alarm can be configured to trigger on any configured input or only when all enabled configured inputs are active. Administratively disabled inputs are ignored for alarm triggering.

Digital inputs are considered normally open. This means that a digital input becomes active only if it closes. Analog inputs have a customizable voltage threshold. This threshold can be configured using the thresholds command. Analog inputs become active when this threshold is crossed.

The no form of this command removes the trigger.

Default

no trigger

Parameters
any

specifies that any configured input trigger will raise an alarm

all

specifies that all configured input triggers that are enabled are required to raise an alarm

alarm-input

identifies the input trigger, up to a maximum of eight

for Ethernet ports, the format is:

     port-slot/mda/port [name]

for the Auxiliary Alarm card, the format is:

     alarm-slot/mda.{d | a}-alarm-num [name]

for the four alarm inputs on the fan module (for the 7705 SAR-8 Shelf V2), alarm connector (for the 7705 SAR-M, 7705 SAR-H, 7705 SAR-Hc, 7705 SAR-Wx, and 7705 SAR-X), and alarm module (for the 7705 SAR-18), the format is:

     alarm.d-alarm-num [name]

where:

     slot = card slot number for IOM (always 1 on the 7705 SAR)

     mda = Ethernet adapter card or Auxiliary Alarm card slot number (for Ethernet modules or ports on platforms with no card slots, the mda slot number is preconfigured)

     port = port number for Ethernet ports

     d = digital input

     a = analog input

     alarm-num = alarm port number (1 to 24 for digital on the Auxiliary Alarm card, 1 to 4 for digital on the four chassis alarm inputs, 1 or 2 for analog)

     name = optional name assigned to the input

for example: alarm-1/3.d-3

windowOpen3

alarm.d-1

The name option lets users assign a more meaningful name (must be unique) to the alarm input; for example, windowOpen3 might be more meaningful to a user than the identifier alarm-1/3.d-3. Once the name has been configured, it can be used interchangeably with the alarm input identifier; for example, windowOpen3 can be used instead of alarm-1/3.d-3 as an alarm input trigger.

input

Syntax

input alarm-input

Context

config>external-alarms

Description

This command enables the context to configure the external alarm inputs on 7705 SAR Ethernet ports, on the Auxiliary Alarm card, and on the four alarm inputs on the fan module (for the 7705 SAR-8 Shelf V2), alarm connector (for the 7705 SAR-M, 7705 SAR-H, 7705 SAR-Hc, 7705 SAR-Wx, and 7705 SAR-X), and alarm module (for the 7705 SAR-18).

An alarm input must be associated with an alarm in order for the input to be triggered. See the trigger command. An input can be associated with up to four alarms.

Default

n/a

Parameters
alarm-input

identifies the alarm input

for Ethernet ports, the format is:

     port-slot/mda/port [name]

for the Auxiliary Alarm card, the format is:

     alarm-slot/mda.{d | a}-alarm-num [name]

for the four alarm inputs on the fan module (for the 7705 SAR-8 Shelf V2), alarm connector (for the 7705 SAR-M, 7705 SAR-H, 7705 SAR-Hc, 7705 SAR-Wx, and 7705 SAR-X), and alarm module (for the 7705 SAR-18), the format is:

     alarm.d-alarm-num [name]

where:

     slot = card slot number for IOM (always 1 on the 7705 SAR)

     mda = Ethernet adapter card or Auxiliary Alarm card slot number (for Ethernet modules or ports on platforms with no card slots, the mda slot number is preconfigured)

     port = port number for Ethernet ports

     d = digital input

     a = analog input

     alarm-num = alarm port number (1 to 24 for digital on the Auxiliary Alarm card, 1 to 4 for digital on the four chassis alarm inputs, 1 or 2 for analog)

     name = optional name assigned to the input

for example:

alarm-1/3.d-3

windowOpen3

alarm.d-1

The name option lets users assign a more meaningful name (must be unique) to the alarm input; for example, windowOpen3 might be more meaningful to a user than the identifier alarm-1/3.d-3. Once the name has been configured, it can be used interchangeably with the alarm input identifier; for example, windowOpen3 can be used instead of alarm-1/3.d-3 as an alarm input trigger for the trigger command, or when performing a show>external-alarms>input or show>external-alarms> output command.

debounce

Syntax

debounce seconds

debounce detect detect-seconds clear clear-seconds

no debounce

Context

config>external-alarms>input

Description

This command configures the debounce time associated with detecting and clearing an alarm input. Debounce time is not supported on alarm inputs on Ethernet ports.

The no debounce form of the command sets both the detect time and clear time to 0.

Default

2 (for both detect time and clear time)

Parameters
seconds

specifies the amount of time that the input must be on or off before it is accepted as changed from on to off (or from off to on)

Values

1 to 60

detect-seconds

specifies the amount of time that the input must be on before it is accepted as on by the system

Values

0 to 60

clear-seconds

specifies the amount of time that the input must be off before it is accepted as off by the system

Values

0 to 60

output

Syntax

output alarm-output

Context

config>external-alarms

Description

This command enables the context to configure the external alarm output relays.

Default

n/a

Parameters
alarm-output

identifies the output relay, in the following format:

    relay-slot/mda.d-relay-num [name]

where:

     slot = slot number of the card in the chassis (always 1 on the 7705 SAR)

     mda = Auxiliary Alarm card slot number

     d = digital output

     relay-num = output relay number (1to 8)

     name = name assigned to the output relay

for example:

relay-1/3.d-5

doorHolder5

The name option lets users assign a more meaningful name (must be unique) to the output relay; for example, doorHolder5 might be more meaningful to a user than the output relay identifier relay-1/3.d-5. Once the name has been configured, it can be used interchangeably with the alarm identifier; for example, doorHolder5 can be used instead of relay-1/3.d-5 when performing a show>external-alarms>output command.

name

Syntax

name name-string

no name

Context

config>external-alarms>input

config>external-alarms>output

Description

This command configures a name for the alarm input or output relay. The configured name must be unique within the external alarms context; therefore, it must not be the same as an alarm-input name configured for the trigger or input command, or an alarm-output name configured for the output command. For example, alarm-1/3.d-1 or doorOpen1 cannot be used as a name for any alarm input, and relay-1/3.d-5 or doorHolder5 cannot be used as a name for any output relay.

The no form of this command does not associate a name with the alarm input or output relay.

Default

no name

Parameters
name-string

specifies a unique name for the alarm input or output relay (maximum of 15 characters)

normally

Syntax

normally {open | closed}

Context

config>external-alarms>input

Description

This command configures the normal condition of the digital input – either normally open or normally closed. You cannot configure the normal condition on alarm inputs on Ethernet ports.

Default

normally open

APS Port Commands

port

Syntax

[no] port {aps-id}

Context

config

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure APS on SONET/SDH ports and assigns an APS group ID. Both working and protection circuits must be configured with the same APS group ID on either the same 7705 SAR node (SC-APS) or on two 7705 SAR nodes (MC-APS).

Parameters
aps

keyword

id

1 to 8

aps

Syntax

aps

Context

config>port

Description

This command configures APS on SONET/SDH ports. An APS group contains a working and protection circuit with the same APS group ID on either a single 7705 SAR node (SC-APS) or on two 7705 SAR nodes (MC-APS).

The working circuit must be connected to the peer working circuit, and the protection circuit must be connected to the peer protection circuit.

The aps command is only available for APS groups, not for physical ports.

advertise-interval

Syntax

advertise-interval advertise-interval

no advertise-interval

Context

config>port>aps

Description

This command specifies the time interval, in 100s of milliseconds, between ‟I am operational” messages sent by the protection and working circuits to their neighbor in an MC-APS group. The advertise-interval value is valid only for an MC-APS.

Default

10

Parameters
advertise-interval

the time interval, in 100s of milliseconds, between transmitted operational messages

Values

10 to 650

hold-time

Syntax

hold-time hold-time

no hold-time

Context

config>port>aps

Description

This command specifies how much time can pass without the node receiving an advertise packet from its neighbor before the MC-APS signaling link is considered operationally down. The hold time is in 100s of milliseconds and is usually the advertise-interval value multiplied by 3.

Parameters
hold-time

specifies, in 100s of milliseconds, how long to wait for an APS advertise packet before the neighbor in an MC-APS group is considered operationally down.

Values

10 to 650

hold-time-aps

Syntax

hold-time-aps {[lsignal-fail sf-time] [lsignal-degrade sd-time]}

no hold-time-aps

Context

config>port>aps

Description

This command configures hold-down timers to debounce signal failure conditions (lais, b2err-sf) and signal degrade conditions (b2err-sd) for 1+1 unidirectional SC-APS switching mode. If the signal fail or signal degrade conditions exceed the configured hold-down time, APS is activated.

Default

no hold-time-aps (values are 0)

Parameters
sf-time

the signal failure hold-down time in milliseconds, from 1 to 100

sd-time

the signal degrade hold-down time in milliseconds, from 1 to 100

neighbor

Syntax

neighbor ip-address

no neighbor

Context

config>port>aps

Description

This command specifies the neighbor's IP address in an MC-APS group. When the value of the neighbor IP address is set to 0.0.0.0, or not set, this implies that the APS group is configured as an SC-APS group.

The route to the neighbor must not traverse the MC-APS member (working or protection) circuits. It is recommended that the neighbor IP address configured be on a shared network between the routers that own the working and protection circuits. The node should be connected with a direct interface to ensure optimum failover time.

By default, no neighbor address is configured and both the working and protection circuits should be configured on the same router as an SC-APS group.

Default

0.0.0.0

Parameters
ip-address

specifies the neighbor's IP address for MC-APS.

Values

ipv4-address:       a.b.c.d

ipv6-address:       x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)

                              x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d

                              x:   [0 to FFFF]H

                              d:   [0 to 255]D

protect-circuit

Syntax

protect-circuit port-id

no protect-circuit

Context

config>port>aps

Description

This command configures a physical port that will act as the protection circuit for this APS group.

The protection circuit port must contain only the default configuration and cannot belong to another APS group. The protection circuit port must be of the same type as the working circuit (SONET/SDH) for the APS group; if it is not, the command will return an error.

A protection circuit can only be added if the working circuit already exists. The protection circuit must be removed from the configuration before the working circuit can be removed.

When a port is a protection circuit of an APS group, the configuration options available in the config>port port-id>sonet-sdh context are not allowed for that port unless they are in the following exception list:

  • clock-source

  • [no] loopback

  • [no] report-alarm

  • section-trace

  • [no] threshold

When a port is configured as a protection circuit of an APS group, the configurations listed above and all service configurations related to the APS port are operationally inherited by the protection circuit. If the protection circuit cannot inherit the configurations (due to resource limitations), the configuration attempt fails and an error is returned to the user.

The protection circuit must be shut down before it can be removed from the APS group port. The inherited configuration for the circuit and APS operational commands for that circuit are not preserved when the circuit is removed from the APS group.

The no form of this command removes the protection circuit.

Default

n/a

Parameters
port-id

the physical port that will act as the protection circuit for this APS group in the format slot/mda/port

rdi-alarms

Syntax

[no] rdi-alarms {suppress | circuit}

Context

config>port>aps

Description

This command configures how RDI alarms (line, path, section) are generated on physical circuits of an APS port. The command is only supported in 1+1 unidirectional SC-APS mode. When you configure RDI alarms on a port on the 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card, the second port is automatically configured with a matching RDI alarms setting. As a consequence, both ports will then support only 1+1 unidirectional SC-APS mode.

Default

circuit

Parameters
suppress

RDI hardware generation on working and protection circuits is suppressed. No alarms are generated upon an Rx failure of that circuit.

circuit

RDI alarms are hardware-generated independently on each working and protection circuit based on an Rx failure of that circuit, regardless of APS line status

revert-time

Syntax

revert-time minutes

no revert-time

Context

config>port>aps

Description

This command configures how long the 7705 SAR waits before switching back to the working circuit after it has been restored to service.

If the minutes value is changed, it takes effect at the next initiation of the wait-to-restore (WTR) timer.

This command does not modify the length of a WTR timer that has already been started. The WTR timer of a non-revertive switch can be assumed to be infinite.

The no form of this command restores the default (non-revertive) mode – the switch back does not occur unless the protection circuit fails or it is manually switched by the operator.

Parameters
minutes

the time to wait, in minutes, before reverting to the working circuit after it has been restored to service

Values

0 to 60

Default

5

switching-mode

Syntax

switching mode {bi-directional | uni-1plus1}

Context

config>port>aps

Description

This command configures the switching mode for the APS port. SC-APS supports both bi-directional and uni-1plus1; MC-APS supports only bi-directional switching mode.

Default

bi-directional

Parameters
bi-directional

provides protection in both directions

uni-1plus1

provides protection in one direction

working-circuit

Syntax

working-circuit port-id

no working-circuit

Context

config>port>aps

Description

This command configures a physical port that will act as the working circuit for this APS group.

The working circuit port must contain only the default configuration and cannot be part of another APS group. The working circuit must be created before the protection circuit.

When a port is a working circuit of an APS group, the configuration options available in the config>port port-id>sonet-sdh context are not allowed for that port unless they are in the following exception list:

  • clock-source

  • [no] loopback

  • [no] report-alarm

  • section-trace

  • [no] threshold

When a port is configured as a working circuit of an APS group, the configurations listed above and all service configurations related to the APS port are operationally inherited by the working circuit from the APS group ID. If the working circuit cannot inherit that configuration (for example, due to resource limitations), the configuration attempt fails and an error is returned to the user.

The working circuit must be shut down before it can be removed from an APS group. The inherited configuration for the circuit and APS operational commands for that circuit are not preserved when the circuit is removed from the APS group.

All configurations for the APS group under the config>port context and its submenus and all configuration for services that use this APS group ID are preserved as a non-activated configuration since the APS group no longer has any physical circuits assigned.

The no form of this command removes the working circuit. The working circuit can only be removed from the configuration after the protection circuit has been removed.

Parameters
port-id

the physical port that will act as the working circuit for this APS group in the format slot/mda/port

T1/E1 LCR Commands

lcr

Syntax

[no] lcr lcr-id

Context

config

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure Line Card Redundancy (LCR) parameters on T1/E1 ports or links. When the lcr-id is specified, this command assigns an LCR group ID. Both working and protection adapter cards must be configured with the same LCR group ID and on the same card type. For SC-LCR, both working and protection adapter cards must be on the same 7705 SAR node. For MC-LCR, the working and protection adapter cards must be on different 7705 SAR nodes.

Parameters
lcr

keyword

id

the LCR group ID, from 1 to 6

advertise-interval

Syntax

advertise-interval advertise-interval

no advertise-interval

Context

config>lcr

Description

This command specifies the time interval between ‟I am operational” messages sent by the protection and working adapter cards to their neighbors in an MC-LCR group. The advertise-interval value is valid only for MC-LCR.

Default

10

Parameters
advertise-interval

the time interval, in tenths of a second, between transmitted operational messages

Values

10 to 650

hold-time

Syntax

hold-time hold-time

no hold-time

Context

config>lcr

Description

This command specifies how much time can pass without the node receiving an advertise packet from its neighbor in an MC-LCR group before the neighbor is considered operationally down. The hold time is usually the advertise-interval value multiplied by 3.

Parameters
hold-time

specifies, in 100s of milliseconds, how long to wait for an LCR advertise packet before the neighbor in an MC-LCR group is considered operationally down

Values

10 to 650

neighbor

Syntax

neighbor ip-address

no neighbor

Context

config>lcr

Description

This command specifies the neighbor IP address in an MC-LCR group. When the value of the neighbor IP address is set to 0.0.0.0, or not set, this implies that the LCR group is configured as an SC-LCR group.

The route to the neighbor must not traverse the MC-LCR member (working or protection) adapter cards. It is recommended that the neighbor be on a shared network between the nodes that are configured with the working and protection cards. The node should be connected with a direct interface to ensure optimum failover time.

By default, no neighbor address is configured and both the working and protection adapter cards should be configured as an SC-LCR group on the same node.

Default

0.0.0.0

Parameters
ip-address

specifies the neighbor IP address for MC-LCR

Values

ipv4-address:       a.b.c.d

ipv6-address:       x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)

                              x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d

                              x:   [0 to FFFF]H

                              d:   [0 to 255]D

protect-mda

Syntax

protect-mda mda-id

no protect-mda

Context

config>lcr

Description

This command configures an adapter card that will act as the protection card for this LCR group.

The protection adapter card must contain only the default configuration and cannot belong to another LCR group. The protection card must be of the same type as the working adapter card for the LCR group; if it is not, the command will return an error.

A protection card can only be added if the working card already exists in the LCR group. The protection card must be removed from the configuration before the working card can be removed.

The protection card must be shut down before it can be removed from the LCR group. The inherited configuration for the protection card and the configured LCR operational commands for that card are not preserved when it is removed from the LCR group.

The no form of this command removes the protection card from the LCR group.

Default

no protect-mda

Parameters
mda-id

the adapter card that will act as the protection card for this LCR group in the format slot/mda, where slot is the slot number of the IOM and mda is the slot number of the adapter card

Values

slot is 1

mda is from 1 to 16

revert-time

Syntax

revert-time minutes

no revert-time

Context

config>lcr

Description

This command configures how long the 7705 SAR waits before switching activity back to the working adapter card after it has been restored to service.

If the minutes value is changed, the change takes effect at the next initiation of the wait-to-restore (WTR) timer.

This command does not modify the duration of a WTR timer that has already been started. The WTR timer of a non-revertive switch can be assumed to be infinite.

The no form of this command restores the default (non-revertive) mode. The switch back does not occur unless the protection adapter card fails or activity is manually switched by the operator.

Default

no revert-time

Parameters
minutes

the time to wait, in minutes, before reverting to the working adapter card after it has been restored to service

Values

0 to 60

Default

5

working-mda

Syntax

working-mda mda-id

no working-mda

Context

config>lcr

Description

This command configures an adapter card that will act as the working card for this LCR group.

The working card must contain only the default configuration and cannot be part of another LCR group. The working card must be created before the protection card.

The working card must be shut down before it can be removed from an LCR group. The inherited configuration for the card and configured LCR operational commands for that card are not preserved when it is removed from the LCR group.

The no form of this command removes the working card from the LCR group. The working card can only be removed from the configuration after the protection card has been removed.

Default

no working-mda

Parameters
mda-id

the adapter card that will act as the working card for this LCR group in the format slot/mda, where slot is the slot number of the IOM and mda is the slot number of the adapter card

Values

slot is 1

mda is from 1 to 16

Microwave Link Commands

port

Syntax

[no] port mw-link-id

Context

config

Description

This command configure a microwave link on a 7705 SAR-8 Shelf V2 or 7705 SAR-18.

The no form of this command removes the microwave link configuration.

Parameters
mw-link-id

specifies the microwave link ID number, using the form mw-link-id

Values

id = 1 to 24

mw

Syntax

mw

Context

config>port

Description

This command enables the context to configure microwave link parameters.

hold-time

Syntax

[no] hold-time {[up hold-time-up] [down hold-time-down]}

Context

config>port>mw

Description

This command configures dampening timers on a microwave link. Dampening timers guard against excessive link transitions reported to upper layer protocols.

The no form of this command removes the dampening timers configuration.

Default

down 0 or up 0 — no microwave link dampening is enabled; link transitions are immediately reported to upper layer protocols

Parameters
hold-time-up

the number of seconds before an up-state to down-state transition is reported to upper layer protocols

Values

0 to 900 s

hold-time-down

the number of seconds before a down-state to up-state transition is reported to upper layer protocols

Values

0 to 900 s

peer-discovery

Syntax

[no] peer-discovery

Context

config>port>mw

Description

This command enables or disables peer discovery on the microwave link.

Peer discovery is used to discover the IP addresses of remote routers over the microwave link, as well as the physical ports of the remote routers corresponding to the primary radios for the microwave link.

Ports with peer discovery disabled do not send peer discovery packets and ignore any received peer discovery packets. The CLI does not display the IP address of peers when peer discovery is disabled.

protection

Syntax

[no] protection

Context

config>port>mw

Description

This command enables protection switching on a microwave link.

The no form of this command removes the protection switching on a microwave link.

radio

Syntax

radio port-id create [main | spare]

no radio port-id

Context

config>port>mw

Description

This command configures an MPR-e radio for a microwave link.

The no form of this command removes an MPR-e spare radio from the specified port

Note: You cannot remove an MPR-e main radio that is associated with a microwave link. The microwave link must be deleted and then reconfigured with the required MPR-e radio.
Parameters
port-id

specifies a port on a Packet Microwave Adapter card on which an MPR-e radio is configured, in the format slot/mda/port (port = 1 through 4)

Note:
  • The port must have an encap-type of dot1q and it cannot be used by any service or interface.

  • Only a main radio can be configured on an odd-numbered port, that is, port 1 or 3.

create

creates the MPR-e radio (mandatory)

main

sets the MPR-e radio as the main (active) radio

spare

sets the MPR-e radio as the spare (standby) radio

database

Syntax

database filename

no database

Context

config>port>mw>radio

Description

This command configures the filename of the MPR-e radio database.

The no form of this command removes the MPR-e radio database configuration.

Default

n/a

Parameters
filename

specifies the name of the MPR-e radio database

Values

up to 32 characters

name

Syntax

name name-string

no name

Context

config>port>mw>radio

Description

This command specifies a name to be associated with an MPR-e radio.

The no form of this command removes the name configured for the MPR-e radio.

Default

n/a

Parameters
name-string

specifies the MPR-e radio name

Values

up to 32 characters

perfmon

Syntax

perfmon [g826] [power] [acm]

Context

config>port>mw>radio

Description

This command enables MWA performance monitoring on microwave links in order to collect G.826, radio power, and Adaptive Coding and Modulation (ACM) level performance statistics.

The no form of this command disables MWA performance monitoring on microwave links.

Default

no perfmon

Parameters
g826

enables performance monitoring for G.826 statistics (BBE, ES, SES, and UAS)

power

enables performance monitoring for radio power statistics

acm

enables performance monitoring for ACM level statistics

rsl-history

Syntax

rsl-history file-url

no rsl-history

Context

config>port>mw>radio

Description

This command enables the RSL history file for an MPR-e radio to be uploaded to the 7705 SAR.

The no form of this command removes the configuration.

Default

no rsl-history

Parameters
file-url

specifies the URL of the RSL history file for the specified radio

Values

local-url:      [cflash-id/][file-path]; 99 characters maximum

standalone

Syntax

[no] standalone

Context

config>port>mw>radio

Description

This command configures the MPR-e radio to operate in standalone mode.

The no form of this command removes the standalone designation and sets the MPR-e radio in MWA mode.

Default

no standalone

suppress-faults

Syntax

suppress-faults [hber] [rsl-threshold] [rdi] [all]

[no] suppress-faults

Context

config>port>mw>radio

Description

This command suppresses detected faults on microwave links. If microwave link faults are detected, an event is logged and the link is disabled. When faults are suppressed, the event is still logged, but the microwave link is not disabled. By default, the system does not suppress faults for FFD.

The no form of this command removes fault suppression.

Default

no suppress-faults

Parameters
hber

suppresses High Bit Error Rate faults

rsl-threshold

suppresses RSL threshold crossing faults

rdi

suppresses RDI faults

all

suppresses all faults

tx-mute

Syntax

[no] tx-mute

Context

config>port>mw>radio

Description

This command mutes the transmitter on the radio MPR-e radio.

The no form of this command disables the mute configuration.

revert

Syntax

[no] revert [eps] [rps]

Context

config>port>mw

Description

This command configures the type of revertive switching on the microwave link. Revertive switching occurs when the MPR-e radio operation switches from the spare radio back to the main radio after a fault condition is cleared.

The no form of this command removes the revertive switching configuration.

Default

n/a

Parameters
eps

sets Equipment Protection Switching as the revertive switching type

Note: If EPS is configured as the revertive switching type, Transmission Protection Switching (TPS) is automatically applied as well; TPS cannot be enabled independently.
rps

sets Radio Protection Switching as the revertive switching type

General Port Commands

port

Syntax

port {port-id | bundle-id}

no port {port-id | bundle-id}

Context

config

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure ports, multilink bundles, and IMA groups. Before a port can be configured, the chassis slot must be provisioned with a valid card type and the adapter card slot must be provisioned with a valid adapter card type. (See the card and mda commands.)

Default

n/a

Parameters
port-id

specifies the physical port ID in the slot/mda/port format, or a virtual port (v-port) on the 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card or 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module (where port-id for the virtual port is either ‟v-port” or 3)

bundle-id

specifies the multilink bundle identifier

The command syntax must be configured as follows:

Syntax

bundle-type-slot/mda.bundle-num

bundle[-ppp]-slot/mda.bundle-num (Creates a multilink PPP bundle)

bundle-ima-slot/mda.bundle-num (Creates an IMA group)

bundle: keyword

slot: card/adapter card slot numbers

bundle-num: 1 to 32

For example:

router1>config# port bundle-1/1.1 (multilink PPP bundle)

router1>config# port bundle-ima-1/1.2 (IMA group bundle)

ddm-events

Syntax

[no] ddm-events

Context

config>port

Description

This command enables or disables digital diagnostic monitoring (DDM) events for the port. DDM is supported on Ethernet SFP ports, OC3 SONET SFP ports, and v-ports.

Default

no ddm-events

dwdm

Syntax

dwdm

Context

config>port

Description

This command configures the Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) parameters.

channel

Syntax

channel channel

Context

config>port>dwdm

Description

This command configures the DWDM ITU channel for a tunable adapter card optical interface. The channel is expressed in a form that is derived from the laser's operational frequency. For example, 193.40 THz corresponds to DWDM ITU channel 34 in the 100 GHz grid and 193.45 THz corresponds to DWDM ITU channel 345 in the 50 GHz grid. The provisioned adapter card must support DWDM tunable optics. For a complete list of supported optics and associated adapter cards, contact your Nokia representative.

The DWDM channel must be set to a non-zero value before the port is set to no shutdown.

The port must be shut down before changing the DWDM channel, and the port must be a physical port to set the DWDM channel.

Parameters
channel

specifies the channel

Values

0: valid on disabled ports

17 to 61 inclusive: 100 GHz channels

175, 185 to 605: 50 GHz channels

Ethernet Commands

ethernet

Syntax

ethernet

Context

config>port

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure Ethernet port attributes on all cards, modules, and chassis that support Ethernet. For the Packet Microwave Adapter card, this command does not apply to ports that support microwave awareness.

access

Syntax

access

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure access mode parameters.

egress

Syntax

egress

Context

config>port>ethernet>access

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure the CIR rate for the aggregate of all the unshaped 4-priority SAPs on the port and to configure the shaper policy.

shaper-policy

Syntax

shaper-policy name

no shaper-policy

Context

config>port>ethernet>access>egress

Description

This command assigns a shaper policy to the specified hybrid port.

For hybrid ports, the shaper policy is independently assigned to access or network egress traffic. When the Ethernet port mode is changed to hybrid mode, the default policy is assigned to access and network traffic. To change an access or network policy, use the commands config>port>ethernet> access>egress>shaper-policy and config>port>ethernet> network>egress>shaper-policy.

For access egress per-customer aggregate shaping, the shaper policy is assigned to a port and SAPs on that port must be bound to a shaper group within the shaper policy bound to that port.

The shaper policy defines shaper parameters such as shaper group, and PIR and CIR rates. The shaper policy is defined in the config>qos>shaper-policy context. See the 7705 SAR Quality of Service Guide, ‟QoS for Hybrid Ports” and ‟Per-Customer Aggregate shapers (Multiservice Site)”, for more information.

Note:
  • The port shaper rate applies to the bulk of access and network traffic. When the configured egress shaper rate is reached, both the access and network traffic scheduling pauses.

  • For hybrid ports, there can be a single shaper policy on access egress and a single shaper policy on network egress. Therefore, all the SAP traffic and all the network traffic is each bound to its own shaper group in the shaper policy (access and network shaper policy, respectively). In other words, shaped SAPs and the bulk/aggregate of unshaped SAPs are shaped together as per the shaper policy assigned to the access egress. A similar behavior applies to network traffic, where the shaped interfaces and the bulk/aggregate of unshaped interfaces are shaped together as per the shaper policy assigned to the network egress.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

‟default”

Parameters
name

specifies an existing shaper policy name

unshaped-sap-cir

Syntax

unshaped-sap-cir cir-rate

no unshaped-sap-cir

Context

config>port>ethernet>access>egress

Description

This command sets the CIR rate for the aggregate of all the unshaped 4-priority SAPs on the port. The default cir-rate is 0 kb/s. When the cir-rate is set to max, the CIR rate adopts the maximum rate of the port, which is set using the egress-rate sub-rate command.

If the cir-rate is higher than the sub-rate, the cir-rate is stored in the configuration database but the sub-rate limit is used.

On a Gen-3-based port, this command can be set for mix-and-match LAG SAP purposes, but is not applied to the Gen-3-based port. See LAG Support on Mixed-Generation Hardware for more information.

The no form of the command sets the unshaped-sap-cir CIR rate to 0 kb/s.

Default

no unshaped-sap-cir

Parameters
cir-rate

the CIR rate for the aggregate of all the unshaped 4-priority SAPs on the port

Values

0 to 100000000 kb/s, or max

Default

0 kb/s

autonegotiate

Syntax

autonegotiate [limited]

no autonegotiate

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command enables speed autonegotiation and duplex autonegotiation on Ethernet ports.

The 8-port Gigabit Ethernet Adapter card, 10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card in x10-1gb-sfp mode, and Packet Microwave Adapter card support speed autonegotiation and duplex autonegotiation on all SFP ports. Each port can run in full-duplex mode or in half-duplex mode at 10 or 100 Mb/s.

The 6-port Ethernet 10Gbps Adapter card and the 7705 SAR-X support speed autonegotiation and duplex autonegotiation on all SFP ports; SFP+ ports do not support autonegotiation. Each SFP port can run in full-duplex mode or half-duplex mode at 10 Mb/s or 100 Mb/s, and in full-duplex mode at 1 Gb/s. Each SFP+ port can run in full-duplex mode at 10 Gb/s.

Speed autonegotiation takes place automatically — all ports are configured for speed autonegotiation by default. Speed autonegotiation might need to be disabled (for example, if a port must be forced to a certain speed or to avoid speed negotiation loops between the Ethernet Adapter card and other devices). To turn off speed autonegotiation for a port, the user configures the port speed manually.

When autonegotiation is disabled on a port, the port does not attempt to autonegotiate and will only operate at the speed and duplex settings configured for the port. Also, when autonegotiation is disabled, the tx and rx pauses are enabled automatically (the tx and rx pauses are negotiated with the far end if autonegotiation is enabled).

If the limited keyword option is specified, the port will autonegotiate but will only advertise a specific speed and duplex mode. The speed and duplex mode advertised are the settings configured for the port. One use for limited mode is for multispeed gigabit ports to force gigabit operation while keeping autonegotiation enabled for compliance with IEEE 801.3.

The no form of this command disables autonegotiation on this port.

Caution:

  • Autonegotiation must not be disabled on an Ethernet port if the port is connected to an MPR-e radio.

  • For fiber SFP-based Gigabit Ethernet ports, it is recommended that autonegotiation be enabled. If autonegotiation is disabled and the configured speed does not correctly match the capability of the SFP, then the operational state of the link will remain down. Attempting to configure a speed and duplex mode to 1000 Mb/s, half-duplex, is an invalid combination and will be blocked from CLI.

  • For RJ45 interfaces, autonegotiation is mandatory for 1000Base-T operation (if disabled, the behavior is undefined).

Note:

  • If autonegotiation is turned off, the reception and transmission of IEEE 802.3x flow control frames is enabled by default and cannot be disabled. For more information, see Flow Control on Ethernet Ports.

  • Ports belonging to a microwave link must have limited autonegotiation enabled before the link can be added to a LAG.

Default

autonegotiate

cfm-loopback

Syntax

cfm-loopback priority {low | high | dot1p} [match-vlan {vlan-range | none}]

no cfm-loopback

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command enables the port to respond to loopback messages (LBMs) and sets the queuing and scheduling conditions for handling CFM LBM frames. The user selects the desired QoS treatment by enabling the CFM loopback and including the high or low priority with the high or low keyword. The queue parameters and scheduler mappings associated with the high and low keywords are preconfigured and cannot be altered by the user.

The priority dot1p and match-vlan keywords apply only to physical ring ports on the 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card and 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module.

The parameters and mappings have the following settings:

  • for network egress or access egress, where 4-priority scheduling is enabled:

    • high-priority: either cir = port_speed, which applies to all frames that are scheduled via an expedited in-profile scheduler, or RR for all other (network egress queue) frames that reside in expedited queues and are in an in-profile state

    • low-priority: either cir = 0, pir = port_speed, which applies to all frames that are scheduled via a best effort out-of-profile scheduler, or RR for all other frames that reside in best-effort queues and are in an out-of-profile state

  • for the 8-port Gigabit Ethernet Adapter card, the 10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card, and for the v-port on the 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card and 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module, for network egress, where 16-priority scheduling is enabled:

    • high-priority: has higher priority than any user frames

    • low-priority: has lower priority than any user frames

  • for the physical ring ports on the 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card or 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module, which can only operate as network egress, the priority of the LBR frame is derived from the dot1p setting of the received LBM frame. Based on the assigned ring-type network queue policy, dot1p-to-queue mapping is handled using the same mapping rule that applies to all other user frames.

CFM loopback support on a physical ring port on the 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card or 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module differs from other Ethernet ports. For these ports, cfm-loopback is configured using dot1p and an optional list of up to 16 VLANs. The null VLAN is always applied. The CFM loopback message will be processed if it does not contain a VLAN header, or if it contains a VLAN header with a VLAN ID that matches one in the configured match-vlan list.

The no form of the command disables the handling of CFM loopback frames.

Default

no cfm-loopback

Parameters
low

sets the queue parameters and scheduler mappings, as described above

high

sets the queue parameters and scheduler mappings, as described above

dot1p

sets the queue parameters and scheduler mappings on a physical ring port, as described above

match-vlan

sets the matching VLAN IDs that will allow a CFM loopback on a physical ring port when priority is set to dot1p, as described above

Values

vlan-range: 1 to 4094 (for example, 1-10,33,2123)

none: only untagged CFM LBMs are accepted

Default

none

crc-monitor

Syntax

crc-monitor

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command enables the context to configure Ethernet CRC monitoring parameters.

sd-threshold

Syntax

sd-threshold threshold [multiplier multiplier]

no sd-threshold

Context

config>port>ethernet>crc-monitor

Description

This command configures the error rate threshold at which the signal degrade condition is declared on an Ethernet interface. The error rate threshold value is the ratio of errored frames over total frames received, which is calculated as an average over the time set by the sliding window. The value is calculated as M ✕ 10E-N, where M is the optional multiplier used to increase the error ratio, and N is the rate of errored frames allowed (threshold). For example, 3 ✕ 10E-3 sets the error rate threshold at 3 errored frames per 1000 total frames received. If no window-size is configured, a default of 10-s is used. The CRC errors on the interface are sampled once per second.

The multiplier keyword is optional. If the multiplier keyword is omitted, the default value of 1 is used.

The no form of the command disables sd-threshold monitoring.

Default

no sd-threshold

Parameters
threshold

specifies the threshold value

Values

1 to 9

multiplier

specifies the multiplier value

Values

1 to 9

Default

1

sf-threshold

Syntax

sf-threshold threshold [multiplier multiplier]

no sf-threshold

Context

config>port>ethernet>crc-monitor

Description

This command configures the error rate threshold at which the signal fail condition is declared on an Ethernet interface. The error rate threshold value is the ratio of errored frames over total frames received, which is calculated as an average over the time set by the sliding window. The value is calculated as M ✕ 10E-N, where M is the optional multiplier used to increase the error ratio, and N is the rate of errored frames allowed (threshold). For example, 3 ✕ 10E-3 sets the error rate threshold at 3 errored frames per 1000 total frames received. If no window-size is configured, a default of 10-s is used. The CRC errors on the interface are sampled once per second.

The multiplier keyword is optional. If the multiplier keyword is omitted, the default value of 1 is used.

The no form of the command disables sf-threshold monitoring.

Default

no sf-threshold

Parameters
threshold

specifies the threshold value

Values

1 to 9

multiplier

specifies the multiplier value

Values

1 to 9

window-size

Syntax

window-size seconds

no window-size

Context

config>port>ethernet>crc-monitor

Description

This command configures the sliding window size over which the Ethernet frames are sampled to detect signal fail or signal degrade conditions. The command is used jointly with the sd-threshold and the sf-threshold commands.

A sliding window (window-size) is used to calculate a statistical average of CRC error statistics collected every second. Each second, the oldest statistics are dropped from the calculation. For example, if the default 10-s sliding window is configured, at the 11th second the oldest second of statistical data is dropped and the 11th second is included. This sliding average is compared against the configured SD and SF thresholds to determine if the error rate over the window exceeds one or both of the thresholds, which will generate an alarm and log event.

The no form of the command disables window-size monitoring.

Default

10

Parameters
seconds

specifies the size of the sliding window over which the errors are measured

Values

5 to 60

dot1q-etype

Syntax

dot1q-etype 0x0600 to 0xffff

no dot1q-etype

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command specifies the Ethertype expected when the port’s encapsulation type is dot1q.

IEEE 802.1q (also known as VLAN tagging) defines a process to channelize a single Ethernet port or v-port into VLANs. Each VLAN can represent a customer or an application. Up to 4096 VLANs can be configured per port. For more information about VLANs and VLAN tagging, see ‟VLL Services” in the 7705 SAR Services Guide.

The Ethertype specifies the protocol being carried in an Ethernet frame. In 802.1q, the Ethertype is set to the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of 0x8100, which identifies the frame as an IEE 802.1Q-tagged frame. As well, 2 bytes of Tag Control Information (TCI), followed by 2 bytes containing the frame’s original Ethertype are added to the frame. Together, the TPID and TCI make up the VLAN tag.

For Ethernet ports, when the port encap-type is qinq, the dot1q-etype value sets the Ethertype for the inner VLAN tag. The qinq encapsulation type is not supported by v-ports.

Network ports do not allow dot1q-etype settings.

The no form of this command resets the dot1q-etype value to the default.

Default

0x8100

Parameters
0x0600 to 0xffff

specifies the Ethertype to expect

down-when-looped

Syntax

down-when-looped

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command enables the down-when-looped feature on Ethernet ports or v-ports. When the down-when-looped feature is activated, a keepalive loop PDU is transmitted periodically toward the network. The port listens for returning keepalive loop PDUs. A loop is detected if any of the received PDUs have an Ethertype value of 9000 and the source and destination MAC addresses are identical to the MAC address of the port. When a loop is detected, the port is immediately brought down.

Ethernet port-layer line loopbacks and Ethernet port-layer internal loopbacks can be enabled on the same port with the down-when-looped feature. EFM OAM cannot be enabled on the same port with the down-when-looped feature.

keep-alive

Syntax

keep-alive timer

no keep-alive

Context

config>port>ethernet>down-when-looped

Description

This command configures the time interval between the keepalive PDUs transmitted toward the network during loop detection by the down-when-looped feature.

Default

10 s

Parameters
timer

the interval between keepalive PDUs

Values

1 to 120 s

retry-timeout

Syntax

retry-timeout timer

no retry-timeout

Context

config>port>ethernet>down-when-looped

Description

This command configures the minimum wait time before re-enabling the Ethernet port or v-port after it is brought down due to a loop detection.

Default

120

Parameters
timer

the minimum wait time before re-enabling the Ethernet port or v-port

Values

0 s or 10 to 160 s

use-broadcast-address

Syntax

[no] use-broadcast-address

Context

config>port>ethernet>down-when-looped

Description

This command configures the down-when-looped feature to declare a loop when the destination MAC address matches the broadcast MAC address instead of the MAC address of the Ethernet port or v-port.

duplex

Syntax

duplex {full | half}

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command configures the duplex mode of an Ethernet or Fast Ethernet port when autonegotiation is disabled.

The 10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card must be in x10-1gb-sfp mode to support this command.

SFP slots hosting Ethernet or Fast Ethernet SFPs can be configured to full-duplex or half-duplex mode when autonegotiation is disabled. Duplex autonegotiation is automatically turned off when the user sets the mode with this command. SFP slots hosting optical GigE SFPs only support full-duplex mode; duplex autonegotiation is not supported.

On 10 Gb/s ports, the mode is always full duplex and cannot be changed. This includes the ring Ethernet XFP ports and the v-port on the 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card and 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module.

Default

full

efm-oam

Syntax

efm-oam

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command configures EFM-OAM attributes.

accept-remote-loopback

Syntax

[no] accept-remote-loopback

Context

config>port>ethernet>efm-oam

Description

This command enables reactions to loopback control OAMPDUs from peers.

The no form of this command disables reactions to loopback control OAMPDUs.

Default

no accept-remote-loopback

hold-time

Syntax

hold-time time-value

no hold-time

Context

config>port>ethernet>efm-oam

Description

This command sets the amount of time that EFM-OAM will wait before going from a non-operational state to an operational state.

If EFM-OAM goes from an operational state to a non-operational state (other than link-fault), it enters the hold-time period. During this time, EFM-OAM continues to negotiate with the peer if possible, but will not transition to the ‟up” state until the hold time has expired.

If EFM-OAM goes down due to a lower-level fault (for example, the port goes down and EFM-OAM enters the link-fault state), the hold timer is not triggered. When the lower-level fault is cleared, EFM-OAM immediately starts running on the port and transitions to the operational state as soon as possible.

If EFM-OAM goes down because the user administratively disables the protocol, EFM-OAM immediately transitions to the disabled state. When the user re-enables EFM-OAM, the protocol enters the hold time period and EFM-OAM is not operational until the hold time expires.

A hold-time value of 0 indicates that EFM-OAM returns to the operational state without delay.

The hold time affects only the transition from a non-operational state to an operational state; it does not apply to a transition from an operational state to a non-operational state.

Default

no hold-time

Parameters
time-value

the number of seconds that EFM-OAM will wait before returning to an operational state from a non-operational state

Values

0 to 50

Default

0

ignore-efm-state

Syntax

[no] ignore-efm-state

Context

config>port>ethernet>efm-oam

Description

This command decouples the EFM OAM protocol from the port state and operational state.

When this command is configured on the port, any failure in the EFM protocol state (discovery, configuration, time-out, loops, and so on) does not affect the port. Only a protocol warning message is raised to indicate issues with the protocol.

When the command is not configured on a port, the port state is affected by any EFM OAM protocol fault or clear condition.

If the port is a member of a microwave link, the ignore-efm-state command must be enabled before the EFM OAM protocol can be activated. This restriction is required because EFM OAM is not compatible with microwave links.

Default

no ignore-efm-state

mode

Syntax

mode {active | passive}

Context

config>port>ethernet>efm-oam

Description

This command configures the mode of OAM operation for this Ethernet port.

Active mode causes the port to initiate the negotiation process and continually send out efm-oam information PDUs. Passive mode waits for the peer to initiate the negotiation process. A passive mode port cannot initiate monitoring activities (such as loopback) with the peer.

Default

active

transmit-interval

Syntax

[no] transmit-interval interval [multiplier multiplier]

Context

config>port>ethernet>efm-oam

Description

This command configures the transmit interval of OAMPDUs.

Default

interval 10, multiplier 5

Parameters
interval

specifies the transmit interval

Values

1 to 600 (in 100 ms)

multiplier

specifies the multiplier for the transmit-interval to set the local link down timer

Values

2 to 5

tunneling

Syntax

[no] tunneling

Context

config>port>ethernet>efm-oam

Description

This command enables EFM OAMPDU tunneling. OAMPDU tunneling is required when a loopback is initiated from a router end and must be transported over the existing network infrastructure to the other end. Enabling tunneling will allow the PDUs to be mapped to Epipes so that the OAM frames can be tunneled over MPLS to the far end.

To enable Ethernet EFM OAM 802.3ah on the port, use the efm-oam>no shutdown command.

The no form of the command disables tunneling.

Default

no tunneling

egress-rate

Syntax

egress-rate sub-rate [include-fcs] [allow-eth-bn-rate-changes] [hold-time hold-time]

no egress-rate

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command configures the rate of traffic leaving the network.

With the include-fcs option, the egress rate limit is applied to the traffic rate egressing the port with the 4-byte Ethernet FCS field included. If this option is not configured, the egress rate limit is applied to the traffic rate egressing the port without the 4-byte Ethernet FCS field included, and the actual rate of packets leaving the port is slightly higher than the configured egress rate value.

The include-fcs option is not supported on the 7705 SAR-A Fast Ethernet ports (ports 9 to 12) or 4-port SAR-H Fast Ethernet module. On the 6-port SAR-M Ethernet module, the include-fcs option is always on and cannot be disabled to compensate for the 4-byte FCS.

The allow-eth-bn-rate-changes option enables the Y.1731 ETH-BN client MEP option on the port. In applications such as a point-to-point microwave link, where degradation on the line can result in reduced link bandwidth, the egress rate can be dynamically changed based on the available bandwidth on the link as indicated by the ETH-BN server. When enabled, the received rate overrides the configured sub-rate for the port. For information about ETH-BN, including which Ethernet ports support this functionality, see the 7705 SAR OAM and Diagnostics Guide, ‟ITU-T Y.1731 Ethernet Bandwidth Notification (ETH-BN)”.

The bandwidth indicated by the ETH-BN server includes the FCS; therefore, the include-fcs option must be selected if the allow-eth-bn-rate-changes option is selected or the dynamically changed bandwidth will not match the intended rate.

The hold-time is used to limit the number of bandwidth changes as requested by the ETH-BN server. After a rate change occurs based on a Bandwidth Notification Message (BNM), any BMN received before the hold timer expires will be ignored.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

no egress-rate

Parameters
sub-rate

the egress rate in kb/s

Values

1 to 10000000

include-fcs

the egress rate limit is applied to the traffic rate egressing the port with the 4-byte Ethernet FCS field included. This option must be selected if the allow-eth-bn-rate-changes option is selected; otherwise, the dynamically changed bandwidth will not match the intended rate.

allow-eth-bn-rate-changes

enables the Y.1731 ETH-BN client MEP option on the port. The egress rate will be dynamically changed to the bandwidth indicated in messages received from an ETH-BN server MEP. When enabled, the received rate overrides the configured sub-rate for the port.

hold-time

configures the hold time for egress rate bandwidth changes based on a received BNM, in seconds

Values

1 to 600

Default

5

encap-type

Syntax

encap-type {dot1q | null | qinq}

no encap-type

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command configures the encapsulation method used to distinguish customer traffic on an Ethernet access port, network v-port, or different VLANs on a network port.

Before an MPR-e radio can be configured on an MWA port (see radio), the port must have an encapsulation type of dot1q.

The qinq encapsulation type is not supported by v-ports.

The no form of this command restores the default.

See also dot1q-etype and qinq-etype for information about tagging and encapsulation.

Default

null

Parameters
dot1q

ingress frames carry 802.1Q tags, where each tag signifies a different service

null

ingress frames will not use any tags to delineate a service. As a result, only one service can be configured on a port with a null encapsulation type.

qinq

ingress frames carry two stacked tags, where the outer tag is the service provider tag and the inner tag is the customer service tag as defined in 802.1ad

group-encryption

Syntax

[no] group-encryption

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command enables network group encryption (NGE) on the Ethernet port. When NGE is enabled on the port, all received Layer 2 IS-IS and LLDP packets are considered to be NGE packets and must be encrypted using a valid set of keys from any preconfigured key group on the system.

The no form of the command disables NGE on the Ethernet port. NGE cannot be disabled unless all key groups and IP exception filters are removed.

Default

no group-encryption

encryption-keygroup

Syntax

encryption-keygroup keygroup-id direction {inbound | outbound}

no encryption-keygroup direction {inbound | outbound}

Context

config>port>ethernet>group-encryption

Description

This command is used to bind a key group to an Ethernet port for inbound or outbound packet processing. When configured in the outbound direction, packets egressing the router use the active-outbound-sa associated with the configured key group. When configured in the inbound direction, received packets must be encrypted using one of the valid security associations configured for the key group.

The no form of the command removes the key group from the Ethernet port in the specified direction.

Default

no encryption-keygroup direction inbound

no encryption-keygroup direction outbound

Parameters
keygroup-id

the ID number of the key group being configured

Values

1 to 127 | keygroup-name (64 characters maximum)

inbound

binds the key group in the inbound direction

outbound

binds the key group in the outbound direction

hold-time

Syntax

hold-time {[up hold-time-up] [down hold-time-down] [seconds | centiseconds]}

no hold-time

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command configures port link dampening timers, which reduce the number of link transitions reported to upper layer protocols.

The hold-time value is used to dampen interface transitions.

When an interface transitions from an up state to a down state, interface down transitions are not advertised to upper layers until the hold-time-down interval has expired. When an interface transitions from a down state to an up state, interface up transitions are not advertised until the hold-time-up interval has expired.

If the hold-time-down or hold-time-up value is 0, interface down and interface up transitions are immediately reported to upper layer protocols.

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Default

down 0 or up 0 — no port link dampening is enabled; link transitions are immediately reported to upper layer protocols

Parameters
hold-time-up

the interval, in seconds or centiseconds, before an interface transition from a down state to an up state is reported to upper layer protocols

Values

0 to 900 (seconds)

0 | 10 to 90000 (centiseconds, in 5-cs increments)

hold-time-down

the interval, in seconds or centiseconds, before an interface transition from an up state to a down state is reported to upper layer protocols

Values

0 to 900 (seconds)

0 | 10 to 90000 (centiseconds, in 5-cs increments)

seconds
defines the time interval in seconds
centiseconds
defines the time interval in centiseconds

ingress-rate

Syntax

ingress-rate ingress-rate cbs size [bytes | kilobytes]

no ingress-rate

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command configures a policing action to rate-limit the ingress traffic. Ingress-rate enforcement uses dedicated hardware for rate limiting, however software configuration is required at the port level (ingress-rate limiter) to ensure that the network processor or adapter card or port never receives more traffic than they are optimized for.

The configured ingress rate ensures that the network processor does not receive traffic greater than this configured value on a per-port basis. Once the ingress-rate value is reached, all subsequent frames are dropped. The ingress-rate limiter drops excess traffic without classifying whether the traffic has a higher or lower priority.

Similar to the egress-rate configuration, the ingress-rate configuration survives port mode changes. If a port mode is changed (for example, from access to network mode), the ingress rate and configured CBS still remain when the port comes back up.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

no ingress-rate

Parameters
ingress-rate

the ingress rate in Mb/s

Values

1 to 10000

cbs

specifies the committed burst size that the hard policer can accept while complying with the configured ingress rate. Set the cbs value to at least two times the ingress packet size so that the datapath can make a proper policing and forwarding decision.

Note: CBS is integrated with the ingress-rate command and you must always specify the CBS size every time you configure the ingress rate. If you use the default CBS size, you must explicitly indicate that it is the CBS default.
size

specifies the committed burst size in bytes or kilobytes. If configured in bytes, the committed burst size must be a multiple of 256 bytes and must include the bytes parameter. If configured in kilobytes, the maximum value is 127 and must include the kilobytes parameter. If configured as default, the value is set to 130816 bytes.

Values

256 to 130816 bytes

1 to 127 kilobytes

default

Default

130816

src-pause

Syntax

src-pause

no src-pause

Context

config>port>ethernet>ingress-rate

Description

This command sends a notification to slow down the transmission rate when it exceeds the bandwidth limit.

If incoming traffic exceeds the configured ingress rate, an src-pause frame is sent to the far end to hold transmission (src-pause delay timer). When the src-pause delay timer expires, the far end resumes transmission. The src-pause delay timer varies based on the difference between the incoming traffic rate and the configured ingress rate on the port. If the difference is large, then the far end must wait for a longer period before resuming transmission. The src-pause frame helps to prioritize far-end traffic so that the ingress-rate limiter does not drop high-priority traffic.

The ingress-rate limiter can be configured with or without src-pause; however, src-pause is disabled whenever the ingress-rate limiter is disabled.

The no form of this command disables the src-pause feature.

This command is blocked for the 6-port SAR-M Ethernet module.

Default

no src-pause

lacp-tunnel

Syntax

lacp-tunnel

no lacp-tunnel

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command enables LACP packet tunneling for the Ethernet port. When tunneling is enabled, the port does not process any LACP packets, but tunnels them instead. A port with LACP packet tunneling enabled cannot be added as a member of a Link Aggregation Group (LAG).

The no form of this command disables LACP packet tunneling for the Ethernet port.

Default

no lacp-tunnel

loopback

Syntax

loopback {line | internal} {timer {0 | 30 .. 86400} | persistent} [swap-src-dst-mac]

no loopback

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command configures timed line loopbacks on Ethernet network and access ports, timed line loopbacks on ring Ethernet network ports, untimed line loopbacks on Ethernet access ports, and timed and untimed internal loopbacks on Ethernet ports.

For Ethernet ports, a line loopback loops frames received on the corresponding port back towards the transmit (egress) direction inside the network processor. Line loopbacks are supported on ports configured in network or access mode.

You can swap the source and destination MAC addresses of the received frames using the swap-src-dst-mac keyword. The swap-src-dst-mac keyword is not supported on ring Ethernet ports.

An internal loopback loops the frames that are coming in an egress direction from the fabric towards the framer, back to the fabric. This type of loopback is usually referred to as an equipment loopback. Internal loopbacks are supported on ports configured in access mode.

Loopback timers can be configured for 30 s to 86400 s. All non-zero timed loopbacks are turned off under the following conditions: an adapter card reset, an activity switch, or timer expiry. Line or internal loopbacks can also be configured as a latched loopback by setting the timer to 0 s, or as a persistent loopback with the persistent keyword.

Latched and persistent loopbacks are enabled indefinitely until turned off by the user. Latched loopbacks survive adapter card resets and activity switches, but are lost if there is a system restart. Persistent loopbacks survive adapter card resets and activity switches and can survive a system restart if the admin-save or admin-save-detail command was executed prior to the restart. Latched (untimed) persistent loopbacks can be enabled only on Ethernet access ports.

If a loopback exists on a port, it must be disabled or the timer must expire before another loopback can be configured on the same port. An Ethernet loopback cannot be configured on a port that has EFM-OAM enabled on it; EFM-OAM cannot be enabled on a port that has an Ethernet loopback enabled on it.

Persistent loopbacks are the only Ethernet loopbacks saved to the database by the admin-save and admin-save-detail commands.

The no form of this command disables the specified type of loopback.

Parameters
line

places the associated Ethernet port or ring Ethernet port into line loopback mode

internal

places the associated Ethernet access port into internal loopback mode; not supported on ring Ethernet ports

persistent

places the associated Ethernet access port or ring Ethernet port into persistent loopback mode

swap-src-dst-mac

swaps source and destination MAC addresses for Ethernet line loopbacks; not supported on ring Ethernet ports

timer

the timer set for Ethernet loopbacks, in seconds

Values

0 | 30 to 86400

mac

Syntax

mac ieee-address

no mac

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an Ethernet port, ring Ethernet port, or v-port. When the command is issued while the port is operational, IP will issue an ARP, if appropriate, and BPDUs are sent with the new MAC address.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address to the default value.

Default

a default MAC address is assigned by the system

Parameters
ieee-address

specifies the 48-bit MAC address in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC, and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

mode

Syntax

mode {access | network | hybrid}

no mode

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command configures an Ethernet port for access, network, or hybrid mode operation, or configures a ring Ethernet port or v-port for network mode. On ring Ethernet ports and the v-port, the mode is always network and cannot be changed.

An access port is used for customer-facing traffic on which services are configured. A Service Access Point (SAP) can only be configured on an access port or channel. Once an Ethernet port has been configured for access mode, multiple services can be configured on it.

A network port participates in the service provider transport or infrastructure network when network mode is selected.

A hybrid Ethernet port allows the combination of network and access modes of operation on a per-VLAN basis and must be configured for either dot1q or qinq encapsulation.

A hybrid port must use dot1q encapsulation to be configured as a network IP interface. Binding a network IP interface to a qinq encapsulation is blocked. In hybrid mode, qinq encapsulation is for access mode use only.

If the hybrid port is configured for dot1q encapsulation, the user configures a SAP inside a service or a network IP interface as follows:

  • configure a SAP under config>service by providing the SAP ID, which must include the port-id value of the hybrid port and an unused VLAN tag value. The format is port-id:qtag1. A SAP of format port-id:* is also supported.

  • configure a network IP interface under config>router>if>port by providing the port-name, which consists of the port-id of the hybrid port and an unused VLAN tag value. The format is port-id:qtag1. The user must explicitly enter a valid value for qtag1. The port-id:* value is not supported on a network IP interface. The VLAN tag space on the port (range of 0 to 4094) is shared among VLAN SAPs and VLAN network IP interfaces.

If the hybrid port is configured for qinq encapsulation, the user configures a SAP inside a service as follows:

  • configure a SAP under config>service by providing the SAP ID, which must include the port-id value of the hybrid port and the outer and inner VLAN tag values. The format is port-id:qtag1.qtag2. A SAP of format port-id: qtag1.* is also supported. The outer VLAN tag value must not have been used to create an IP network interface on this port. In addition, the qtag1.qtag2 value combination must not have been used by another SAP on this port.

The no form of this command restores the default.

Default

access (except as listed below)

network

  • 10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card (in 1-port 10GigE mode, the port operates in network mode only)

  • 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card

  • 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module

Parameters
access

configures the port as service access

network

configures the port for transport network use

hybrid

configures the port for hybrid use (transport network and service access per VLAN)

mtu

Syntax

mtu mtu-bytes

no mtu

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command configures the maximum payload MTU size for an Ethernet port or a v-port on an Ethernet Ring adapter card (for ring Ethernet ports, the MTU value is fixed at 9728 bytes).

The port-level MTU parameter indirectly defines the largest physical packet the port can transmit or the far-end Ethernet port can receive. Packets to be transmitted over a given port that are larger than the MTU of the port will be fragmented or discarded, depending on whether the DF bit is set in the packet header.

If the port mode or encapsulation type is changed, the MTU assumes the default values of the new mode or encapsulation type.

The no form of this command restores the default values.

Table 2. Port MTU Default and Maximum Values

Port Type

Mode

Encap Type

Default (bytes)

Max MTU (bytes)

10/100 Ethernet1

Access/ Network

null

1514

9724 2

dot1q

1518

9728 2

qinq 3

1522 (access only)

9732 (access only) 2

GigE SFP 1 and 10-GigE SFP+

Access/ Network

null

1514 (access)

1572 (network)

9724 (access and network)

dot1q

1518 (access)

1572 (network)

9728 (access and network)

qinq 3

1522 (access only)

9732 (access only)

Ring port

Network

null

9728 (fixed)

9728 (fixed)

v-port (on Ring adapter card)

Network

null

1572

9724

dot1q

1572

9728

Notes:

  1. The maximum MTU value is supported only on cards that have buffer chaining enabled.
  2. On the Packet Microwave Adapter card, MWA ports support 4 bytes less than Ethernet ports. MWA ports therefore support a maximum MTU of 9720 bytes (null) or 9724 bytes (dot1q). MWA ports do not support qinq.
  3. QinQ is supported only on access ports.
Default

The default MTU value depends on the port type, mode, and encapsulation as listed in Port MTU Default and Maximum Values .

Parameters
mtu-bytes

sets the maximum allowable size of the MTU, expressed as an integer (see Port MTU Default and Maximum Values )

Values

128 to 9732 bytes (Ethernet ports)

phy-tx-clock

Syntax

[no] phy-tx-clock {auto-pref-master | auto-pref-slave | slave | master}

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command configures the 1000Base-T physical layer transmit clock. The mode affects the establishment of the master-slave relationship between two ports sharing a link segment during auto-negotiation. The master port uses a local clock to determine the timing of transmitter operations. The slave port recovers the clock from the signal it receives and uses the signal to determine the timing of transmitter operations. For ports that do not support 1000Base-T, the value defaults to N/A and cannot be changed.

The phy-tx-clock configuration is supported on SFP ports whether or not the SFP is inserted. The phy-tx-clock command applies only to copper-based RJ45 synchronous Ethernet ports. The command can be used on an SFP port that supports fiber and copper, but the command has no effect if a fiber SFP is installed.

The proper value must be set to ensure that the synchronous Ethernet clock relay is correctly configured. See the 7705 SAR Basic System Configuration Guide for more information about synchronous Ethernet.

Default

The default value for the MWA 1000Base-T Ethernet ports on the Packet Microwave Adapter card is master. On other adapter cards, the default value is auto-pref-slave for ports that support 1000Base-T Ethernet connections. The default value is n/a for ports that do not support 1000Base-T Ethernet connections.

Parameters
auto-pref-master

prefers to be master during autonegotiation

auto-pref-slave

prefers to be slave during autonegotiation

slave

forces the port to be the slave clocking source

master

forces the port to be the master clocking source

poe

Syntax

poe [plus]

no poe

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

The poe command enables an RJ45 or RJ point five port that is Power over Ethernet (PoE) capable to deliver power to a ‟Powered Device” at levels compatible with the IEEE 802.3af standard.

The poe plus command enables an RJ45 or RJ point five port that is PoE+ capable to deliver power to a ‟Powered Device” at levels compatible with the IEEE 802.3at standard.

On the 7705 SAR-H, 7705 SAR-Hc, and 6-port SAR-M Ethernet module, a PoE-capable port can be configured for PoE and PoE+. On the 7705 SAR-Wx, a PoE-capable port only supports PoE+ and can only be enabled using the poe plus command.

On the 7705 SAR-H, before a port can be configured for either PoE or PoE+, the PoE power source option must first be configured as either internal or external using the config>system>poe-power-source command; see the 7705 SAR Basic System Configuration Guide, ‟System Command Reference”, for information.

When the 7705 SAR-H is configured for the internal power source option, PoE capability is allowed on ports 5 and 6 only. Port 5 can be configured for PoE+ but in that case, port 6 cannot support PoE. When the system is configured for the external power source option, a mix of PoE and PoE+ is allowed on ports 5, 6, 7, and 8. PoE+ is supported only on ports 5 and 7. Supported PoE/PoE+ Combinations on the 7705 SAR-H describes the allowed mix of PoE and PoE+ ports on the 7705 SAR-H.

Table 3. Supported PoE/PoE+ Combinations on the 7705 SAR-H

PoE Power Supply Source

Port 5

Port 6

Port 7

Port 8

Supported PoE/PoE+ Combinations

Internal

PoE

PoE

No PoE

No PoE

Two PoE ports

Internal

PoE+

No PoE

No PoE

No PoE

One PoE+ port

External

PoE

PoE

PoE

PoE

Four PoE ports

External

PoE

PoE

PoE+

PoE

Three PoE ports and one PoE+ port

External

PoE+

No PoE

PoE+

PoE

One PoE port and two PoE+ ports

On the 6-port SAR-M Ethernet module, ports 5 and 6 on the module can each support PoE. Port 5 can also support PoE+, but if it is configured for PoE+, then port 6 cannot support PoE power.

On the 7705 SAR-Hc, ports 5 and 6 each support PoE and PoE+. If configured for PoE, both ports can be used for PoE simultaneously. Both ports are also capable of supporting PoE+ but not simultaneously; if one port is configured for PoE+, the other port can only be configured for PoE. Ports 5 and 6 can also operate in non-PoE mode.

On the 7705 SAR-Wx, port 5 (the RJ45 port labeled PoE) supports PoE+. The port can also operate in non-PoE+ mode.

To disable PoE/PoE+ on a port and prevent it from delivering power, use the no form of the command. Performing a shutdown command on the port does not disable PoE/PoE+ on the port.

Default

n/a

Parameters
plus

enables PoE+ on the 7705 SAR-H, 7705 SAR-Hc, 7705 SAR-Wx, and 6-port SAR-M Ethernet module

ptp-asymmetry

Syntax

ptp-asymmetry ptp-asymmetry

no ptp-asymmetry

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command configures the PTP asymmetry delay delta on an Ethernet port. The command corrects for known asymmetry for time of day/phase recovery of PTP packets on both local and downstream PTP slave clocks as well as on end-to-end transparent clocks.

Parameters
ptp-asymmetry

the value in nanoseconds that the forward path delay varies from the mean path delay; the value can be a negative number

qinq-etype

Syntax

qinq-etype 0x0600 to 0xffff

no qinq-etype

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command specifies the Ethertype expected when the port’s encapsulation type is qinq. The qinq-etype value sets the Ethertype for the outer VLAN tag when qinq encapsulation is used.

IEEE 802.1ad (also known as VLAN stacking) defines a process to channelize a single Ethernet port or v-port into double-tagged VLANs. Each VLAN can represent a customer or an application. Each tag allows for up to 4096 VLANs to be configured on a port (4096 ✕ 4096 total). For more information about VLANs and VLAN tagging, see ‟VLL Services” in the 7705 SAR Services Guide.

The Ethertype specifies the protocol being carried in an Ethernet frame. In 802.1q, the Ethertype is set to the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of 0x8100, which identifies the frame as an IEEE 802.1Q-tagged frame. As well, 2 bytes of Tag Control Information (TCI), followed by 2 bytes containing the frame’s original Ethertype are added to the frame for each tag (4 bytes total). Together, the TPID and TCI make up a VLAN tag.

The qinq-etype command is not supported by v-ports.

Network ports do not allow qinq-etype settings.

The no form of this command resets the qinq-etype value to the default.

Default

0x8100

Parameters
0x0600 to 0xffff

specifies the Ethertype to expect

report-alarm

Syntax

[no] report-alarm [signal-fail] [remote] [local] [no-frame-lock] [high-ber]

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command specifies when and if to generate alarms and alarm clear notifications for this port.

The command applies only to the physical 10GigE ports on the 7705 SAR-X, 6-port Ethernet 10Gbps Adapter card, 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card, and 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module, and on the 10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card in 1-port 10GigE mode (select x1-10GigE-sf+ with the mda-mode command).

Parameters
signal-fail

reports an Ethernet signal lost alarm

remote

reports remote faults

local

reports local faults

no-frame-lock

reports a ‟not locked on the ethernet framing sequence” alarm

high-ber

reports a high bit error rate alarm

speed

Syntax

speed {10 | 100 | 1000 | 2500 | 10000}

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command configures the port speed of an Ethernet port, ring Ethernet port, or v-port when autonegotiation is disabled.

Default

100 (for Fast Ethernet ports on the 7705 SAR-A (ports 9 to 12), 7705 SAR-Hc (ports 3 and 4), 4-port SAR-H Fast Ethernet module, and 6-port SAR-M Ethernet module (ports 1 and 2))

1000 (for Gigabit Ethernet ports on all adapter cards, modules, and fixed platforms)

2500 on a v-port (this default cannot be changed)

10000 (for the 10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card in 1-port 10GigE mode, 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card, 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module, 6-port Ethernet 10Gbps Adapter card (ports 5 and 6), 7705 SAR-X (ports 1/2/7 and 1/3/7)

Parameters
10

sets the link speed to 10 Mb/s

100

sets the Ethernet port speed to 100 Mb/s

1000

sets the Ethernet port speed to 1000 Mb/s (only supported on GigE SFPs)

2500

sets the v-port speed to 2500 Mb/s (only supported on a v-port)

10000

sets the ring Ethernet port speed (only supported on GigE XFPs) and the SFP+ ports speed on the 6-port Ethernet 10Gbps Adapter card or the 7705 SAR-X to 10 000 Mb/s

ssm

Syntax

ssm

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command enables the Ethernet Synchronization Message Channel (ESMC) capability on a synchronous Ethernet port on the following:

  • 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card

  • 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module

  • 6-port Ethernet 10Gbps Adapter card

  • 8-port Gigabit Ethernet Adapter card

  • 10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card

  • Packet Microwave Adapter card

  • 4-port SAR-H Fast Ethernet module

  • 7705 SAR-A

  • 7705 SAR-Ax

  • 7705 SAR-H

  • 7705 SAR-Hc

  • 7705 SAR-M

  • 7705 SAR-Wx

  • 7705 SAR-X

The ssm command is enabled and disabled using the no shutdown and shutdown commands.

On the 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card and 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module, SSM frames received on the ring Ethernet ports are extracted for processing through the v-port. Therefore, the v-port must be active (that is, in no shutdown mode) in order for SSM to function. The v-port must also be active in order for the 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card or 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module to transmit SSM frames. No additional interface or IP configuration is required on the v-port for SSM.

Default

shutdown

code-type

Syntax

code-type {sonet | sdh}

Context

config>port>ethernet>ssm

Description

This command specifies whether to use SDH or SONET values for the encoding of synchronous status messages on a:

  • synchronous ring Ethernet port on the 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card

  • synchronous ring Ethernet port on the 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 6-port Ethernet 10Gbps Adapter card

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 8-port Gigabit Ethernet Adapter card

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the Packet Microwave Adapter card

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 4-port SAR-H Fast Ethernet module

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 7705 SAR-A

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 7705 SAR-Ax

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 7705 SAR-H

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 7705 SAR-Hc

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 7705 SAR-M

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 7705 SAR-Wx

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 7705 SAR-X

Default

sdh

Parameters
sonet

specifies the values used on a G.781 option 1 compliant network

sdh

specifies the values used on a G.782 option 1 compliant network

tx-dus

Syntax

[no] tx-dus

Context

config>port>ssm

config>port>ethernet>ssm

Description

This command sets the quality level value transmitted from the Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) channel of the following ports to QL-DUS/QL-DNU (do not use for synchronization for timing purposes):

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 6-port Ethernet 10Gbps Adapter card

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 8-port Gigabit Ethernet Adapter card

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the Packet Microwave Adapter card

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 4-port SAR-H Fast Ethernet module

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 7705 SAR-A

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 7705 SAR-Ax

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 7705 SAR-H

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 7705 SAR-Hc

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 7705 SAR-M

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 7705 SAR-Wx

  • synchronous Ethernet port on the 7705 SAR-X

Default

enabled for fiber ports

disabled (no tx-dus) for copper ports

util-stats-interval

Syntax

util-stats-interval seconds

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command configures the interval over which to calculate and display an average percentage of the maximum possible port utilization for an Ethernet port.

Default

300

Parameters
seconds

the utilization statistics calculation interval in seconds

Values

30 to 600

vlan-filter

Syntax

[no] vlan-filter filter-id

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command associates a VLAN filter policy with an ingress ring port on the 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card or 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module.

Filter policies control the forwarding and dropping of packets based on matching criteria. Only one filter policy can be applied to a ring port at a time. The same filter policy can be applied to both ring ports.

The filter-id must already be defined before the vlan-filter command is executed. If the filter policy does not exist, the operation will fail and an error message will be displayed.

The no form of the command removes any configured filter-id association with the ring port. The filter policy cannot be deleted until it is removed from all ring ports where it is applied.

Default

n/a

Parameters
filter-id

the VLAN filter policy ID number or filter name

Values

1 to 65535 or filter-name (up to 64 characters)

xgig

Syntax

xgig {lan | wan}

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command configures the specified 10-Gb/s interface in LAN or WAN mode. When configuring the port for WAN mode, you can change some SONET/SDH parameters to reflect the SONET/SDH requirements for this port. When you configure a port for LAN mode, all SONET/SDH parameters are predetermined and not configurable. The command is supported on the 7705 SAR-X, 6-port Ethernet 10Gbps Adapter card, 10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card, 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card, and 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module.

On the 6-port Ethernet 10Gbps Adapter card, both 10-Gb/s interfaces (ports 5 and 6) operate in the same xgig mode, either LAN mode or WAN mode. Setting the xgig mode for either port sets the mode for both ports.

Default

lan

Parameters
lan

specifies that the port operates in LAN mode

wan

specifies that the port operates in WAN mode

xor-mode

Syntax

xor-mode {rj45 | rjp5 | sfp}

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command configures the operational mode of Ethernet XOR combination ports. Ethernet XOR ports on the 7705 SAR-A, 7705 SAR-Ax, 7705 SAR-H, and 7705 SAR-X can be configured to operate as either RJ45 ports or SFP ports. Ethernet XOR ports on the 6-port SAR-M Ethernet module can be configured to operate as either RJ point five ports or SFP ports. The mode can be configured on each port independently. See the individual hardware installation guides for more information.

Default

rj45 (for applicable 7705 SAR chassis); rjp5 (for 6-port SAR-M Ethernet module)

Parameters
rj45

specifies that the port operate as a 10/100/1000Base-T electrical RJ45 port (applicable 7705 SAR chassis only)

rjp5

specifies that the port operate as a 10/100/1000Base-T electrical RJ point five port (6-port SAR-M Ethernet module only)

sfp

specifies that the port operate as an SFP port

GNSS Commands

gnss

Syntax

gnss

Context

config>port

Description

This command enters the context to perform GNSS receiver port configuration.

Default

n/a

antenna-cable-delay

Syntax

antenna-cable-delay 0 .. 32767

no antenna-cable-delay

Context

config>port>gnss

Description

This command configures the expected signal delay resulting from the length of the antenna cable.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

0

Parameters
0 .. 32767

the signal delay, in nanoseconds

elevation-mask-angle

Syntax

elevation-mask-angle 0 .. 89

no elevation-mask-angle

Context

config>port>gnss

Description

This command configures the elevation mask angle. It provides a method of filtering satellites to be used by the system.

Configuring an elevation mask angle below 10° is not recommended.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

10

Parameters
0 .. 89

the elevation mask angle, in degrees.

type

Syntax

[no] type [gps] [glonass]

Context

config>port>gnss

Description

This command configures which GNSS system or systems will be used by the GNSS receiver.

The no form of this command removes the specified GNSS system or systems.

By default, gps is configured. Configuring glonass does not remove gps; the GNSS receiver will use both GPS and GLONASS systems.

Default

gps

Parameters
gps

configures the GNSS receiver to use the American GPS GNSS system

glonass

configures the GNSS receiver to use the Russian GLONASS GNSS system

IEEE 802.1x Ethernet Port Commands

dot1x

Syntax

dot1x

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure port-specific 802.1x authentication attributes on an Ethernet port.

mac-auth

Syntax

[no] mac-auth

Context

config>port>ethernet>dot1x

Description

This command enables MAC-based authentication. To use MAC-based authentication, 802.1x authentication must first be enabled using the port-control auto command.

When MAC-based authentication is enabled, and the mac-auth-wait timer expires, the 7705 SAR begins listening on the port for valid Ethernet frames. The source address of a received frame is used for MAC-based authentication.

The no form of this command disables MAC-based authentication.

Default

no mac-auth

mac-auth-wait

Syntax

mac-auth-wait seconds

no mac-auth-wait

Context

config>port>ethernet>dot1x

Description

This command configures the delay period before MAC authentication is activated and the 7705 SAR searches for a valid client MAC address.

The no form of this command disables the delay and allows MAC authentication to be used immediately.

Default

no mac-auth-wait

Parameters
seconds

specifies the MAC authentication delay period in seconds

Values

1 to 3600

max-auth-req

Syntax

max-auth-req max-auth-request

no max-auth-req

Context

config>port>ethernet>dot1x

Description

This command configures the maximum number of times that the 7705 SAR will send an access request RADIUS message to the RADIUS server. If a reply is not received from the RADIUS server after the specified number of attempts, the 802.1x authentication process is considered to have failed.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

2

Parameters
max-auth-req

the maximum number of RADIUS retries

Values

1 to 10

port-control

Syntax

port-control {auto | force-auth | force-unauth}

no port-control

Context

config>port>ethernet>dot1x

Description

This command configures the 802.1x authentication mode.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

force-auth

Parameters
auto

enables 802.1x authentication. The port starts in the unauthorized state, allowing only EAPOL frames to be sent and received through the port. Both the 7705 SAR and the host (supplicant) can initiate an authentication process. The port will remain in the unauthorized state until the first supplicant is authenticated successfully. After this, traffic is allowed on the port for all connected hosts.

force-auth

disables 802.1x authentication and causes the port to transition to the authorized state without requiring any authentication exchange. The port transmits and receives normal traffic without requiring 802.1x-based host authentication.

force-unauth

causes the port to remain in the unauthorized state, ignoring all attempts by the hosts to authenticate. The authenticator cannot provide authentication services to the host through the interface.

quiet-period

Syntax

quiet-period seconds

no quiet-period

Context

config>port>ethernet>dot1x

Description

This command configures the time between two authentication sessions during which no EAPOL frames are sent by the 7705 SAR. The timer is started after sending an EAP-Failure message or after expiry of the supplicant timeout timer.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

60

Parameters
seconds

specifies the quiet period in seconds

Values

1 to 3600

radius-plcy

Syntax

radius-plcy name

no radius-plcy

Context

config>port>ethernet>dot1x

Description

This command configures the RADIUS policy to be used for 802.1x authentication. An 802.1x RADIUS policy must be configured (under config>system>security>dot1x) before it can be associated with a port. If the RADIUS policy ID does not exist, an error is returned. Only one 802.1x RADIUS policy can be associated with a port at a time.

The no form of this command removes the RADIUS policy association.

Default

no radius-plcy

Parameters
name

specifies an existing 802.1x RADIUS policy name

re-auth-period

Syntax

re-auth-period seconds

no re-auth-period

Context

config>port>ethernet>dot1x

Description

This command configures the number of seconds the system will wait before performing reauthentication. This value is only relevant if reauthentication is enabled with the re-authentication command.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

3600

Parameters
seconds

specifies the reauthentication delay period in seconds

Values

1 to 9000

re-authentication

Syntax

[no] re-authentication

Context

config>port>ethernet>dot1x

Description

This command enables or disables periodic 802.1x reauthentication.

When reauthentication is enabled, the 7705 SAR will reauthenticate clients on the port after waiting the number of seconds defined by the re-auth-period command.

The no form of this command disables 802.1x reauthentication.

Default

no re-authentication

server-timeout

Syntax

server-timeout seconds

no server-timeout

Context

config>port>ethernet>dot1x

Description

This command configures the time during which the 7705 SAR waits for the RADIUS server to respond to its access request message. When this timer expires, the 7705 SAR will resend the access request message, up to the number of times specified by the max-auth-req command.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

30

Parameters
seconds

specifies the server timeout period in seconds

Values

1 to 300

supplicant-timeout

Syntax

supplicant-timeout seconds

no supplicant-timeout

Context

config>port>ethernet>dot1x

Description

This command configures the time the 7705 SAR waits for a client to respond to its EAPOL messages. When the supplicant timeout period expires, the 802.1x authentication session is considered to have failed.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

30

Parameters
seconds

specifies the supplicant timeout period in seconds

Values

1 to 300

transmit-period

Syntax

transmit-period seconds

no transmit-period

Context

config>port>ethernet>dot1x

Description

This command configures the time after which the 7705 SAR sends a new EAPOL request message.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

30

Parameters
seconds

specifies the server transmit period in seconds

Values

1 to 3600

tunneling

Syntax

[no] tunneling

Context

config>port>ethernet>dot1x

Description

This command enables the tunneling of untagged 802.1x frames received on a port for both Epipe and VPLS services using a null SAP or a default SAP on a dot1q or qinq port. When configured, untagged 802.1x frames are switched into the service with the corresponding supported SAP. 802.1x tunneling is supported only when the port-control command is set to force-auth.

The no form of this command disables tunneling of untagged 802.1x frames.

Default

no tunneling

LLDP Ethernet Port Commands

Refer to the 7705 SAR Basic System Configuration Guide, ‟System Management”, for LLDP system commands.

lldp

Syntax

lldp

Context

config>port>ethernet

Description

This command enables the context to configure LLDP parameters on the specified port.

Note: In order for LLDP to be operational on the Ethernet ports on the 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card/module, the v-port must be active (that is, in no shutdown mode).

dest-mac

Syntax

dest-mac {nearest-bridge | nearest-non-tpmr | nearest-customer}

Context

config>port>ethernet>lldp

Description

This command configures destination MAC address parameters.

Parameters
nearest-bridge

configures the LLDP to use the nearest bridge

nearest-non-tpmr

configures the LLDP to use the nearest non-two-port MAC relay (TPMR) bridge

nearest-customer

configures the LLDP to use the nearest customer bridge

admin-status

Syntax

admin-status {rx | tx | tx-rx | disabled}

Context

config>port>ethernet>lldp>dest-mac

Description

This command specifies the administratively desired status of the local LLDP agent.

Default

disabled

Parameters
rx

specifies that the LLDP agent will receive, but will not transmit, LLDP frames on this port

tx

specifies that the LLDP agent will transmit LLDP frames on this port and will not store any information about the remote systems connected to it

tx-rx

specifies that the LLDP agent will transmit and receive LLDP frames on this port

disabled

specifies that the LLDP agent will not transmit or receive LLDP frames on this port. If there is remote system information that was received on this port and stored in other tables before the port’s admin-status was disabled, the information will naturally age out.

notification

Syntax

[no] notification

Context

config>port>ethernet>lldp>dest-mac

Description

This command enables LLDP notifications.

The no form of the command disables LLDP notifications.

Default

no notification

port-id-subtype

Syntax

port-id-subtype {tx-if-alias | tx-if-name | tx-local}

Context

config>port>ethernet>lldp>destmac

Description

This command specifies how to encode the port ID TLV transmit to the peer. The default setting tx-local (ifindex value) is required by some versions of the NSP NFM-P to properly build the Layer 2 topology map using LLDP. Changing this value to transmit the ifName (tx-if-name) or ifAlias (tx-if-alias) in place of the ifindex (tx-local) may affect the ability of the NSP NFM-P to build the Layer 2 topology map using LLDP.

Default

tx-local

Parameters
tx-if-alias

transmits the ifAlias string (subtype 1) that describes the port as stored in the IF-MIB, either user-configured or the default entry (that is, 10/100/Gig Ethernet SFP)

tx-if-name

transmits the ifName string (subtype 5) that describes the port as stored in the IF-MIB ifName info

tx-local

the interface ifindex value (subtype 7) as the port ID

tx-mgmt-address

Syntax

tx-mgmt-address [system] [system-ipv6]

no tx-mgmt-address

Context

config>port>ethernet>lldp>dest-mac

Description

This command specifies which management address to transmit. The 7705 SAR can only be configured to send or not send the system address.

If the no form of the command is used, the port will not include the system management address TLV in any LLDPDUs it transmits.

Default

no tx-mgmt-address

Parameters
system

specifies to use the system IPv4 address. The system address is only transmitted after it has been configured.

system-ipv6

specifies to use the system IPv6 address. The system address is only transmitted after it has been configured.

tx-tlvs

Syntax

tx-tlvs [port-desc] [sys-name] [sys-desc] [sys-cap]

no tx-tlvs

Context

config>port>ethernet>lldp>dest-mac

Description

This command specifies which LLDP optional TLVs to transmit.

If the no form of the command is used, the port will not include any optional TLVs in any LLDPDUs it transmits.

Default

no tx-tlvs

Parameters
port-desc

indicates that the LLDP agent should transmit port description TLVs

sys-name

indicates that the LLDP agent should transmit system name TLVs

sys-desc

indicates that the LLDP agent should transmit system description TLVs

sys-cap

indicates that the LLDP agent should transmit system capabilities TLVs

Ring MAC Operations Commands

disable-aging

Syntax

[no] disable-aging

Context

config>card>mda>ring

Description

This command disables MAC address aging across an Ethernet ring.

As is the case for a Layer 2 switch, learned MACs can be aged out if no packets are sourced from the MAC address for a period of time (the aging time). In each ring, there are independent aging timers for local learned MAC and remote learned MAC entries in the FDB. The disable-aging command turns off aging for local and remote learned MAC addresses.

The no form of this command enables aging on the ring.

Default

no disable-aging

disable-learning

Syntax

[no] disable-learning

Context

config>card>mda>ring

Description

This command disables learning of new MAC addresses in the ring FDB.

When disable-learning is enabled, new source MAC addresses will not be entered in the ring FDB. This is true for both local and remote MAC addresses.

When disable-learning is disabled, new source MAC addresses will be learned and entered into the ring FDB.

This parameter is mainly used in conjunction with the discard-unknown-source command.

The no form of this command enables learning of MAC addresses.

Default

no disable-learning

discard-unknown-source

Syntax

[no] discard-unknown-source

Context

config>card>mda>ring

Description

This command specifies that packets with an unknown source MAC address received on a ring port will be dropped if the source MAC is not already in the FDB (that is, the source MAC was not learned before the discard-unknown-source command was enabled or is not a static entry already created for the packet MAC).

When disabled, the packets are flooded to the other ring port or forwarded to the v-port (if the packets are addressed to the v-port).

The no form of this command disables discard-unknown-source.

Default

no discard-unknown-source

fdb-table-high-wmark

Syntax

fdb-table-high-wmark high-water-mark

no fdb-table-high-wmark

Context

config>card>mda>ring

Description

This command specifies the upper threshold value for learned FDB entries. The high-water-mark is configured as a percentage of the FDB. When the number of FDB entries exceeds the high-water-mark, the system raises a log event.

The no form of this command returns the maximum FDB table high-water-mark to the default (95%).

Default

no fdb-table-high-wmark

Parameters
high-water-mark

specifies the upper threshold for FDB entries as a percentage of FDB table size, which when exceeded, causes the system to raise a log event

Values

0 to 100

fdb-table-size

Syntax

fdb-table-size table-size

no fdb-table-size

Context

config>card>mda>ring

Description

This command specifies the maximum number of MAC entries in the dynamic FDB for the ring.

The no form of this command returns the maximum FDB table size to the default (512).

Default

no fdb-table-size

Parameters
table-size

the maximum number of learned MAC entries in the FDB for the ring

Values

4 to 512

mac-pinning

Syntax

[no] mac-pinning port port-id

Context

config>card>mda>ring

Description

This command keeps MAC address information that has been learned from a source frame in the FDB until the expiry of the mac-aging timer, which is specified using the remote-age command). If a MAC address is pinned and a frame with an existing source MAC address is received from the other ring port, the FDB entry is not altered—the address that was learned from the first source frame is preserved until the expiry of the aging timer. If the aging timer is disabled, then the MAC address remains pinned until the timer is enabled again.

The no form of this command disables mac-pinning.

Default

no mac-pinning

Parameters
port-id

specifies the physical ring port

remote-age

Syntax

remote-age aging-timer

no remote-age

Context

config>card>mda>ring

Description

This command specifies the aging time for remotely learned MAC addresses in the FDB.

As is the case for a Layer 2 switch, learned MAC addresses can be aged out if no packets are sourced from the MAC address for a period of time (the aging time). The remote-age timer specifies the aging time for remotely learned MAC addresses.

The no form of this command returns the remote aging timer to the default value (900 s).

Default

no remote-age

Parameters
aging-timer

the aging time for remote MAC addresses, expressed in seconds

Values

60 to 86400

static-mac

Syntax

[no] static-mac mac ieee-address port port-id [create]

Context

config>card>mda>ring

Description

This command creates a local static MAC entry in the FDB for the specified port. The maximum number of static MAC addresses per ring adapter card is 256.

Static MAC definitions on one edge device are not propagated to other edge devices; that is, each edge device has an independent FDB.

Only one static MAC entry (local or remote) can be defined per MAC address per instance.

By default, no static MAC address entries are defined.

The no form of this command deletes the static MAC entry with the specified MAC address associated with the port from the FDB.

Parameters
ieee-address

specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee and ff are hexadecimal numbers (cannot be all zeros). Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC, and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

port-id

specifies the port that is associated with the specified MAC address

create

this keyword is mandatory when specifying a static MAC address  

Serial Commands

serial

Syntax

serial

Context

config>port

Description

This command enables the context to configure RS-232, V.35, X.21, or RS-530 parameters for a port on a channelized 12-port Serial Data Interface card, or to configure RS-232 parameters for an RS-232 port on the 7705 SAR-Hc or on the 4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module. This context cannot be accessed by any other adapter card, module, or platform.

On the 12-port Serial Data Interface card version 2, if the port has been enabled for an RS-530 interface through the use of an adapter cable, X.21 configuration applies to the RS-530 interface. There is no configuration specifically for RS-530 operation on this card version. For the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3, there is a separate rs530 command to configure RS-530 channel parameters.

A serial port configuration allows some or all of the bandwidth to be dedicated to a port by aggregating a number of DS0s into a single bundle.

Serial data transmission rates below the rate of a single DS0, that is, less than 64 kb/s, are achieved using a proprietary protocol called High Capacity Multiplexing (HCM). These speeds, known as subrate speeds, are supported on RS-232, X.21, and RS-530 ports.

Default

n/a

rs232

Syntax

[no] rs232

Context

config>port>serial

Description

This command enables the context to configure RS-232 parameters for a channel. When one of the ports on a connector has been configured for an RS-232 channel, the other ports on the connector can only be configured for RS-232.

The no form of this command deletes the RS-232 channel.

Default

n/a

rs530

Syntax

[no] rs530

Context

config>port>serial

Description

This command enables the context to configure RS-530 parameters for a channel on a 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3. When one port on a connector is configured for an RS-530 channel, the other port on the connector can only be configured for RS-530.

The no form of this command deletes the RS-530 channel.

Default

n/a

v35

Syntax

[no] v35

Context

config>port>serial

Description

This command enables the context to configure V.35 parameters for a channel. When one of the ports on a connector has been configured for a V.35 channel, the other ports on the connector can only be configured for V.35. The no form of this command deletes the V.35 channel.

The no form of this command deletes the V.35 channel.

Default

n/a

x21

Syntax

[no] x21

Context

config>port>serial

Description

This command enables the context to configure X.21 parameters for a channel. When one of the ports on a connector has been configured for an X.21 channel, the other ports on the connector can only be configured for X.21.

On a 12-port Serial Data Interface card version 2, if the port has been enabled for an RS-530 interface through the use of an adapter cable, X.21 configuration applies to the RS-530 interface. There is no configuration specifically for RS-530 operation. All X.21 functionality is available on the RS-530 interface, except that only DCE operation is supported for RS-530. However, because X.21 does not support all the control leads available for RS-530, only a subset of the RS-530 control leads are supported.

The no form of this command deletes the X.21 channel.

Default

n/a

character-length

Syntax

character-length {6 | 7 | 8}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command configures the number of data bits used to transmit a character. This command is valid only if device-mode is asynchronous. The value for this command cannot be 8 if the value for parity is anything other than no parity (that is, anything other than none) and the value for stop-bits is 2.

Default

8

Parameters
6

specifies six bits in a character

7

specifies seven bits in a character

8

specifies eight bits in a character

clock-source

Syntax

clock-source {external | slave | dcr-serial}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>v35

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command configures the source of the transmit clock. The command is valid only if device-mode is synchronous.

The 12-port Serial Data Interface card version 2, 4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module, and 7705 SAR-Hc support slave clocking only. The 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3, supports all clocking options.

Synchronization Clocking Options  describes the clocking options. See the device-gender command for information on setting DTE or DCE on serial data interface ports.

Table 4. Synchronization Clocking Options 
Attached Device Gender 7705 SAR Port Gender Tx Clock Option Description
DTE DCE DTE DCE

Slave

DCE slave: the transmit and receive clocks are derived from the Baud Rate Generator (BRG) locked to the system timing

Slave

DTE slave: the transmit and receive clocks are supplied by the attached DCE device

DCR serial

DCR DCE: the transmit and receive clocks are derived from the far-end clock transported via DCR serial (12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3, only)

DCR serial

DCR DTE: the transmit and receive clocks are supplied by the attached DCE device (12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3, only)

External 1

DCE Ext: the transmit clock is provided by the attached DTE device. The received clock is derived from the internal BRG. (12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3, only)

External 1

DTE Ext: the transmit clock is provided by the attached DCE device. The received clock is derived from the internal BRG. (12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3, only)

Note:

  1. External is commonly referred to as terminal timing.
Default

slave

Parameters
external

terminal timing mode

slave

slave mode

dcr-serial

the Rx Clk signal from the DTE port is used as the source of the clock, which is also transported to the DCE port across the network; only supported for SAToP serial Cpipes for synchronous RS-232 and RS-530 ports on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3

control-lead

Syntax

control-lead {input | monitor | output}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>v35

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure the input and output leads that carry control signals. Control signals provide the handshaking for call setup, teardown, and synchronization.

Control Leads summarizes the supported control leads for each protocol.

Table 5. Control Leads

Protocol

DCE

DTE

RS-232

Input

DTR, RTS, ALB, RDL

DSR, DCD, CTS, RI

Output

DSR, DCD, CTS, RI

DTR, RTS, ALB, RDL

V.35

Input

DTR, RTS, ALB

DSR, DCD, CTS

Output

DSR, DCD, CTS

DTR, RTS, ALB

X.21

Input

C

I

Output

I

C

RS-530

Input

DTR, RTS, RL, LL

DSR, DCD, CTS, TM

Output

DSR, DCD, CTS, TM

DTR, RTS, RL, LL

Default

n/a

input

Syntax

input

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>control-lead

config>port>serial>rs530>control-lead

config>port>serial>v35>control-lead

config>port>serial>x21>control-lead

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure the input control leads.

Default

n/a

alb-cts

Syntax

alb-cts {high | low | end-to-end}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>control-lead>input

config>port>serial>v35>control-lead>input

Description

This command configures the Analog Loopback (ALB) or Clear To Send (CTS) input control lead. The input signal that is sent depends on the device-gender setting. For a DCE device, the input signal is ALB. For a DTE device, the input signal is CTS.

This command is valid only for RS-232 and V.35 interfaces.

Default

high

Parameters
high

the input control lead is assumed to be on

low

the input control lead is assumed to be off

end-to-end

the input control lead follows that of the remote end. This parameter is not supported for interface speeds ≥ 64 kb/s.

c-i

Syntax

c-i {high | low | end-to-end}

Context

config>port>serial>x21>control-lead>input

Description

This command configures the Control (C) or Indication (I) input control lead. The input signal that is sent depends on the device-gender setting. For a DCE device, the input signal is C. For a DTE device, the input signal is I.

This command is valid only for X.21 interfaces.

Default

high

Parameters
high

the input control lead is forced on

low

the input control lead is forced off

end-to-end

the input control lead follows that of the remote end

dtr-dsr

Syntax

dtr-dsr {high | low}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>control-lead>input

config>port>serial>rs530>control-lead>input

config>port>serial>v35>control-lead>input

Description

This command configures the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) or Data Set Ready (DSR) input control lead. The input signal that is sent depends on the device-gender setting. For a DCE device, the input signal is DTR. For a DTE device, the input signal is DSR.

This command is valid only for RS-232, RS-530, and V.35 interfaces.

Default

high

Parameters
high

the input control lead is assumed to be on

low

the input control lead is assumed to be off

ll-tm

Syntax

ll-tm {high | low}

Context

config>port>serial>rs530>control-lead>input

Description

This command configures the Local Loopback (LL) or Test Mode (TM) input control lead. The input signal that is sent depends on the device-gender setting. For a DCE device, the input signal is LL. For a DTE device, the input signal is TM.

This command is valid only for RS-530 interfaces.

Default

on

Parameters
high

the input control lead is assumed to be on

low

the input control lead is assumed to be off

rdl-ri

Syntax

rdl-ri {high | low}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>control-lead>input

Description

This command configures the Remote Digital Loopback (RDL) or Ring Indicator (RI) input control lead. The input signal that is sent depends on the device-gender setting. For a DCE device, the input signal is RDL. For a DTE device, the input signal is RI.

This command is valid only for RS-232 interfaces.

Default

high

Parameters
high

the input control lead is assumed to be on

low

the input control lead is assumed to be off

rl-cts

Syntax

rl-cts {high | low | end-to-end}

Context

config>port>serial>rs530>control-lead>input

Description

This command configures the Remote Loopback (RL) or Clear To Send (CTS) input control lead. The input signal that is sent depends on the device-gender setting. For a DCE device, the input signal is RL. For a DTE device, the input signal is CTS.

This command is valid only for RS-530 interfaces.

Default

high

Parameters
high

the input control lead is assumed to be on

low

the input control lead is assumed to be off

end-to-end

the input control lead follows that of the remote end

rts-dcd

Syntax

rts-dcd {high | low | end-to-end}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>control-lead>input

config>port>serial>rs530>control-lead>input

config>port>serial>v35>control-lead>input

Description

This command configures the Request To Send (RTS) or Data Carrier Detect (DCD) input control lead. The input signal that is sent depends on the device-gender setting. For a DCE device, the input signal is RTS. For a DTE device, the input signal is DCD.

This command is valid only for RS-232, RS-530, and V.35 interfaces.

Default

high

Parameters
high

the input control lead is assumed to be on

low

the input control lead is assumed to be off

end-to-end

the input control lead follows that of the remote end. This parameter is not supported for interface speeds ≥ 64 kb/s on RS-232 and V.35 interfaces.

monitor

Syntax

monitor

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>control-lead

config>port>serial>rs530>control-lead

config>port>serial>v35>control-lead

config>port>serial>x21>control-lead

Description

This command enables access to the context to monitor the input control leads. When monitoring is enabled on a control lead, the 7705 SAR polls the status of the control lead every second. Any change in state of the control lead causes an alarm to be raised. This functionality provides an indication to the operator of a problem in the DTE-to-DCE path; for example, it can indicate that the far-end device is disconnected.

Monitoring is enabled on a per-lead basis. The monitoring functionality is supported on ports configured for either DTE or DCE.

Default

n/a

alb-cts

Syntax

alb-cts {on | off | high | low}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>control-lead>monitor

config>port>serial>v35>control-lead>monitor

Description

This command enables monitoring on the Analog Loopback (ALB) or Clear To Send (CTS) input control lead. For a DCE device, the input control lead is ALB. For a DTE device, the input control lead is CTS.

This command is valid only for RS-232 and V.35 interfaces.

Default

off

Parameters
on

monitoring is enabled on the lead

off

monitoring is disabled on the lead

high

enable monitoring and force link down when lead is high (only supported on 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

low

enable monitoring and force link down when lead is low (only supported on 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

c-i

Syntax

c-i {on | off | high | low}

Context

config>port>serial>x21>control-lead>monitor

Description

This command enables monitoring on the Control (C) or Indication (I) input control lead. For a DCE device, the input control lead is C. For a DTE device, the input control lead is I.

This command is valid only for an X.21 interface.

Default

off

Parameters
on

monitoring is enabled on the lead

off

monitoring is disabled on the lead

high

enable monitoring and force link down when lead is high (only supported on 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

low

enable monitoring and force link down when lead is low (only supported on 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

dtr-dsr

Syntax

dtr-dsr {on | off | high | low}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>control-lead>monitor

config>port>serial>rs530>control-lead>monitor

config>port>serial>v35>control-lead>monitor

Description

This command enables monitoring on the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) or Data Set Ready (DSR) input control lead. For a DCE device, the input control lead is DTR. For a DTE device, the input control lead is DSR.

This command is valid only for RS-232, RS-530, and V.35 interfaces.

Default

off

Parameters
on

monitoring is enabled on the lead

off

monitoring is disabled on the lead

high

enable monitoring and force link down when lead is high (only supported on 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

low

enable monitoring and force link down when lead is low (only supported on 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

ll-tm

Syntax

ll-tm {on | off | high | low}

Context

config>port>serial>rs530>control-lead>monitor

Description

This command enables monitoring on the Local Loopback (LL) or Test Mode (TM) input control lead. For a DCE device, the input signal is LL. For a DTE device, the input signal is TM.

This command is valid only for RS-530 interfaces.

Default

on

Parameters
on

monitoring is enabled on the lead

off

monitoring is disabled on the lead

high

enable monitoring and force link down when lead is high

low

enable monitoring and force link down when lead is low

rl-cts

Syntax

rl-cts {on | off | high | low}

Context

config>port>serial>rs530>control-lead>monitor

Description

This command enables monitoring on the Remote Loopback (RL) or Clear To Send (CTS) input control lead. For a DCE device, the input signal is RL. For a DTE device, the input signal is CTS.

This command is valid only for RS-530 interfaces.

Default

high

Parameters
on

monitoring is enabled on the lead

off

monitoring is disabled on the lead

high

enable monitoring and force link down when lead is high

low

enable monitoring and force link down when lead is low

rdl-ri

Syntax

rdl-ri {on | off | high | low}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>control-lead>monitor

Description

This command enables monitoring on the Remote Digital Loopback (RDL) or Ring Indicator (RI) input control lead. For a DCE device, the input control lead is RDL. For a DTE device, the input control lead is RI.

This command is valid only for RS-232 interfaces.

Default

off

Parameters
on

monitoring is enabled on the lead

off

monitoring is disabled on the lead

high

enable monitoring and force link down when lead is high (only supported on 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

low

enable monitoring and force link down when lead is low (only supported on 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

rts-dcd

Syntax

rts-dcd {on | off | high | low}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>control-lead>monitor

config>port>serial>rs530>control-lead>monitor

config>port>serial>v35>control-lead>monitor

Description

This command enables monitoring on the Request To Send (RTS) or Data Carrier Detect (DCD) input control lead. For a DCE device, the input control lead is RTS. For a DTE device, the input control lead is DCD.

This command is valid only for RS-232, RS-530, and V.35 interfaces.

Default

off

Parameters
on

monitoring is enabled on the lead

off

monitoring is disabled on the lead

high

enable monitoring and force link down when lead is high (only supported on 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

low

enable monitoring and force link down when lead is low (only supported on 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

output

Syntax

output

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>control-lead

config>port>serial>rs530>control-lead

config>port>serial>v35>control-lead

config>port>serial>x21>control-lead

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure the output control leads.

Default

n/a

cts-alb

Syntax

cts-alb {high | low | end-to-end}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>control-lead>output

config>port>serial>v35>control-lead>output

Description

This command configures the Clear To Send (CTS) or Analog Loopback (ALB) output control lead. The output signal that is sent depends on the device-gender setting. For a DCE device, the output signal is CTS. For a DTE device, the output signal is ALB.

This command is valid only for RS-232 and V.35 interfaces.

Default

high

Parameters
high

the output control lead is forced on

low

the output control lead is forced off

end-to-end

the output control lead follows that of the remote end, except when the output control lead is carrying a CTS signal on an RS-232 port operating at subrate speeds. In this case, the control lead follows the HCM status:

  • if the HCM status is Up, the CTS output control lead is 1

  • if the HCM status is Down, the CTS output control lead is 0

cts-rl

Syntax

cts-rl {high | low | end-to-end}

Context

config>port>serial>rs530>control-lead>output

Description

This command configures the Clear To Send (CTS) or Remote Loopback (RL) output control lead. The output signal that is sent depends on the device-gender setting. For a DCE device, the output signal is CTS. For a DTE device, the output signal is RL.

This command is valid only for RS-530 interfaces.

Default

high

Parameters
high

the output control lead is forced on

low

the output control lead is forced off

end-to-end

the output control lead follows that of the remote end

dcd-rts

Syntax

dcd-rts {high | low | end-to-end}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>control-lead>output

config>port>serial>rs530>control-lead>output

config>port>serial>v35>control-lead>output

Description

This command configures the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) or Request To Send (RTS) output control lead. The output signal that is sent depends on the device-gender setting. For a DCE device, the output signal is DCD. For a DTE device, the output signal is RTS.

This command is valid only for RS-232, RS-530, and V.35 interfaces.

Default

high

Parameters
high

the output control lead is forced on

low

the output control lead is forced off

end-to-end

the output control lead follows that of the remote end

dsr-dtr

Syntax

dsr-dtr {high | low}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>control-lead>output

config>port>serial>rs530>control-lead>output

config>port>serial>v35>control-lead>output

Description

This command configures the Data Set Ready (DSR) or Data Terminal Ready (DTR) output control lead. The output signal that is sent depends on the device-gender setting. For a DCE device, the output signal is DSR. For a DTE device, the output signal is DTR.

This command is valid only for RS-232, RS-530, and V.35 interfaces.

Default

high

Parameters
high

the output control lead is forced on

low

the output control lead is forced off

tm-ll

Syntax

dsr-dtr {high | low}

Context

config>port>serial>rs530>control-lead>output

Description

This command configures the Test Mode (TM) or Local Loopback (LL) output control lead. The output signal that is sent depends on the device-gender setting. For a DCE device, the output signal is TM. For a DTE device, the output signal is LL.

This command is valid only for RS-530 interfaces.

Default

high

Parameters
high

the output control lead is forced on

low

the output control lead is forced off

i-c

Syntax

i-c {high | low | end-to-end}

Context

config>port>serial>x21>control-lead>output

Description

This command configures the Indication (I) or Control (C) output control lead. The output signal that is sent depends on the device-gender setting. For a DCE device, the output signal is I. For a DTE device, the output signal is C.

This command is valid only for X.21 interfaces.

Default

high

Parameters
high

the output control lead is forced on

low

the output control lead is forced off

end-to-end

the output control lead follows that of the remote end

ri-rdl

Syntax

ri-rdl {high | low}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>control-lead>output

Description

This command configures the Ring Indicator (RI) or Remote Digital Loopback (RDL) output control lead. The output signal that is sent depends on the device-gender setting. For a DCE device, the output signal is RI. For a DTE device, the output signal is RDL.

This command is valid only for RS-232 interfaces.

Default

high

Parameters
high

the output control lead is forced on

low

the output control lead is forced off

data-position

Syntax

data-position {F0-B5 | F0-B6}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command configures the HCM data start position for an RS-232, RS-530, or X.21 interface.

When s-bit-signaling is on, the F0-B6 option is blocked. When the data position is set to F0-B6, S-bit signaling cannot be turned on.

This command is only valid for ports configured for subrate speeds.

Note: The HCM frame (10-row by 8-column matrix) cannot be displayed on the CLI.
Default

F0-B5

Parameters
F0-B5

HCM data start position is F0-B5

F0-B6

HCM data start position is F0-B6

device-gender

Syntax

device-gender {dte | dce}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>v35

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command configures the gender of the device.

Data and control signals are transmitted and received over wire pairs. The gender of a device indicates which wire in the pair is used to send and receive the signal.

On ports on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 2, the data and control signals are electrically wired as DCE. Regardless of the gender configured, the Tx pin on the port is always an input pin and the Rx pin on the port is always an output pin. Changing a port from DCE to DTE does not change the pin orientation. Therefore, when a port is configured as DTE, a crossover cable is required in order to interconnect with some serial devices. If the port has been enabled for an RS-530 interface through the use of an adapter cable, only DCE operation is supported.

Note: On the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3, device-gender must match the cable type being used (either DCE or DTE).
Default

dce

Parameters
dte

the device is performing the role of the data terminal equipment

dce

the device is performing the role of the data communications equipment

device-mode

Syntax

device-mode {synchronous | asynchronous}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>v35

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command configures the mode of operation for the device. An RS-232, RS-530, or X.21 channel can be configured for either synchronous or asynchronous mode. Asynchronous mode is not supported on a V.35 channel; V.35 can only be configured for synchronous mode.

Asynchronous mode is supported only on channels with subrate speeds of 38 400 b/s or less with the exception of RS-232 interfaces configured as raw sockets. See the socket and speed commands for more information.

On the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3, a V.35, X.21, or RS-530 channel operating at a super-rate speed can be configured for synchronous mode.

Default

synchronous

Parameters
synchronous

transmits data continuously based on timing

asynchronous

transmits data one character at a time

duplex

Syntax

duplex {half | full}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>v35

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command configures the duplex mode.

Half-duplex mode uses a single transmission path.

Full-duplex mode uses two independent transmission paths, one in each direction, allowing two connected devices to transmit and receive data simultaneously.

Half-duplex mode is not user-selectable; an error message is displayed if this option is selected. Half-duplex mode is selected automatically if multidrop data bridge (multi-drop) is configured in slave mode (applies to RS-232 only).

Default

full

Parameters
half

uses a single transmission path

full

uses two independent transmission paths, one in each direction

hold-time

Syntax

hold-time {[up hold-time-up] [down hold-time-down]}

no hold-time

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>v35

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command configures the serial link dampening timers in 100s of milliseconds, which guards against reporting excessive interface transitions. Once implemented, subsequent transitions of the interface from one state to another are not advertised to upper layer protocols until the configured timer has expired.

Default

no hold-time

Parameters
hold-time-up

the hold-timer for link-up event dampening. A value of zero (0) indicates that an up transition is reported immediately.

Values

0 to 100 (in 100s of milliseconds)

hold-time-down

the hold-timer for link-down event dampening. A value of zero (0) indicates that a down transition is reported immediately.

Values

0 to 100 (in 100s of milliseconds)

invert-clock

Syntax

[no] invert-clock

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>v35

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command enables the inverting of the receive clock used to sample data in order to improve performance under noisy conditions.

The no form of this command disables loopback on the inverting of the clock used to sample data.

This command is only supported on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3.

Default

n/a

loopback

Syntax

loopback {bidir-b | bidir-e | bidir-e-signalling}

no loopback

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>v35

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command puts the specified interface into a loopback mode. The corresponding interface must be in a shutdown state in order for the loopback mode to be enabled.

In the serial context, a bidirectional loopback B or E can be configured. A bidirectional loopback is a circuit loopback that loops traffic from the line back to the line and simultaneously loops traffic from the system back to the system. Bidirectional loopback B takes place on the control card (CSM) side of the adapter card, and is closer to the system. Loopback E takes place on the data device side of the adapter card, and is closer to the line.

This command is not saved in the system configuration between boots.

The no form of this command disables loopback on the interface.

Default

no loopback

Parameters
bidir-b

specifies that the loopback is bidirectional loopback B (not supported on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

bidir-e

specifies that the loopback is bidirectional loopback E

bidir-e-signalling
specifies that the loopback is bidirectional loopback E and is looping the internal signaling; this option is only supported on RS-530 interfaces

mon-clock-deviation

Syntax

mon-clock-deviation {[raise debounce-time-r] [clear debounce-time-c]}

no mon-clock-deviation

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>v35

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command raises or clears the debounce time for monitoring clock deviation.

The no form of this command removes the monitoring clock deviation configuration.

This command is only supported on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3.

Default

no mon-clock-deviation

Parameters
raise

raises the debounce time

debounce-time-r

specifies how much debounce time to raise

Values

10 to 100 s, increments of 10 s

clear

clears the debounce time

debounce-time-c

specifies how much debounce time to clear

Values

10 to 100 s, increments of 10 s

mon-data-inactivity

Syntax

mon-data-inactivity {[raise debounce-time-r] [clear debounce-time-c]}

no mon-data-inactivity

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>v35

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command raises or clears the debounce time for monitoring data inactivity.

The no form of this command removes the monitoring data inactivity configuration.

This command is only supported on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3.

Default

no mon-data-inactivity

Parameters
raise

raises the debounce time

debounce-time-r

specifies how much debounce time to raise

Values

10 to 100 s, increments of 10 s

clear

clears the debounce time

debounce-time-c

specifies how much debounce time to clear

Values

10 to 100 s, increments of 10 s

multi-drop

Syntax

multi-drop {disabled | slave | master}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command configures the multidrop data bridge (MDDB) mode. MDDB is a polling scheme used on SCADA networks (supervisory or control systems used in utility, oil and gas, and other vertical applications) to communicate with multiple remote terminal units (RTUs) over a single RS-232, RS-530, or X.21 link.

In an MDDB, several circuits take turns using the same bandwidth to communicate with one circuit. Each slave device transmits data in that bandwidth when requested by the master device. The master device sends polling messages to, and looks for data from, the slave devices in that bandwidth.

One example of a multidrop data bridge is several terminals taking turns to communicate with a host computer. The circuit that all the other circuits communicate with is connected to a master device (a computer) and is designated the master; the rest of the circuits are connected to slave devices (terminals) and are designated slaves.

In a SCADA network, the 7705 SAR provides the communications infrastructure to connect the central masters to multiple RTUs at remote locations, where the masters and RTUs communicate over serial RS-232 and X.21 synchronous or asynchronous links, or serial RS-530 asynchronous links (RS-530 links are only supported on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3). The 7705 SAR-8 Shelf V2 or 7705 SAR-18 located at the master site contains the Integrated Services card, which provides the MDDB bridge functionality and acts as the MDDB master. Remote 7705 SAR nodes connected to RTUs are referred to as MDDB slaves.

For both master and slave applications, the 7705 SAR must be physically connected to the SCADA device by one of the following:

  • a 7705 SAR-8 Shelf V2 or 7705 SAR-18 using the 12-port Serial Data Interface card

  • a 7705 SAR-H using the 4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module (supports RS-232 links only)

  • a 7705 SAR-Hc using an on-board RS-232 serial port (supports RS-232 links only)

Note: The 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 2, supports the RS-530/RS-422 interface with the use of an adapter cable that connects to a DB15 connector on the front of the X.21 distribution panel. There is no configuration specifically for the RS-530/RS-422 interface on this card; configuration is done in X.21 mode and applies to the RS-530/RS-422 interface when it is physically enabled through hardware. For information about 12-port Serial Data Interface card adapter cables, see the 7705 SAR Serial Data Interface Card Installation Guide. The 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3, supports the RS-530 interface without the need for an adapter cable.

Multidrop data bridge is supported only at subrate speeds (less than 64 kb/s) on X.21 interfaces.

When an RS-232 interface is configured as an MDDB slave, the duplex mode is automatically set to half-duplex and s-bit-signaling is forced off. When multidrop data bridge is disabled, the duplex mode is set back to the default of full-duplex and S-bit signaling is turned on (but can be set back to off).

Note: An X.21 interface configured as an MDDB slave does not change duplex mode; half-duplex is not supported on X.21.

When either an RS-232, RS-530, or X.21 interface is configured as an MDDB master, the duplex mode is automatically set to full-duplex and S-bit signaling is forced off.

Default

disabled

Parameters
disabled

MDDB mode is off

slave

the port is operating as an MDDB slave device

master

the port is operating as an MDDB master device

parity

Syntax

parity {odd | even | mark | space}

no parity

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command configures the parity bit in a character. Parity is an error detection method that adds an extra bit to each character, based on the number of 0s or 1s in the character.

This command is valid only if device-mode is asynchronous. The value for this command must be no parity (that is, none) if the character-length value is 8 and the stop-bits value is 2.

The no form of this command disables the parity bit in a character.

Default

no parity

Parameters
odd

the parity bit is set to 0 or 1 to make the total number of 1s in the set of bits odd

even

the parity bit is set to 0 or 1 to make the total number of 1s in the set of bits even

mark

the parity bit is present but not used and is always set to 1

space

the parity bit is present but not used and is always set to 0

report-alarm

Syntax

[no] report-alarm [hcmOof | hcmRai] [ctrlLeadMon] [monClockDev] [monDataInac]

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>v35

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command enables logging of alarms.

The no form of this command disables the logging of the specified alarms.

Parameters
hcmOof

reports local HCM out-of-frame errors. When configured, hcmOof events are raised and cleared.

Default

HCM out-of-frame alarms are issued

hcmRai

reports remote HCM alarm indications. When configured, hcmRai events are raised and cleared.

Default

HCM alarm indications are issued

ctrlLeadMon

reports input control lead monitoring alarm indications (only supported on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

Default

input control lead monitoring alarm indications are issued

monClockDev

reports clock deviation monitoring alarm indications (only supported on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

Default

clock deviation monitoring alarm indications are issued

monDataInac

reports data inactivity monitoring alarm indications (only supported on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

Default

data inactivity monitoring alarm indications are issued

s-bit-signaling

Syntax

s-bit-signaling {on | off}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command configures the S-bit signaling option on an RS-232, RS-530, or X.21 interface.

For RS-232 interfaces only, if multi-drop is configured as slave or master, the system automatically turns S-bit signaling off. The signaling mode cannot then be changed. If multi-drop is configured as disabled, the system automatically turns S-bit signaling on. When multi-drop is in disabled mode, S-bit signaling can be turned off or on.

This command is only valid for ports configured for subrate speeds.

Default

on

Parameters
on

enables S-bit signaling

off

disables S-bit signaling

socket

Syntax

[no] socket socket-id

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

Description

This command creates a socket on an RS-232 port. When a socket is configured, the RS-232 channel-group command is blocked. If the port is already configured as a channel group before the socket is configured, this command is blocked.

The RS-232 port must be in asynchronous mode.

The no form of the command deletes the socket from the serial port.

Default

n/a

Parameters
socket-id

specifies the raw socket ID number

Values

1

encap-type

Syntax

encap-type encap-type

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>socket

Description

This command specifies the encapsulation type for a socket. When the encapsulation type is set, then the socket is considered operational and the port can be further configured as an IP transport subservice under an IES or VPRN service.

If the serial port has already been configured as an IES or VPRN IP transport subservice, then this command is blocked until the IP transport subservice is deconfigured.

Default

raw

Parameters
encap-type

specifies the encapsulation type to be used with the socket

Values

raw

rx

Syntax

rx

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>socket

Description

This command enables the context to configure parameters for data packets received over a serial port’s raw socket.

Default

n/a

eop

Syntax

eop

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>socket>rx

Description

This command enables the context to configure end-of-packet (EOP) parameters for data packets received over the socket.

Note: An end-of-packet will be declared by whichever EOP condition is encountered first.
Default

n/a

idle-timeout

Syntax

idle-timeout milliseconds

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>socket>rx>eop

Description

This command specifies how long a serial port can remain idle before an EOP is declared and the packet is sent over the socket.

Default

50 ms

Parameters
milliseconds

specifies the length of time, in milliseconds, that a serial port can remain idle before an EOP is declared

Values

10 to 5000

length

Syntax

length bytes

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>socket>rx>eop

Description

This command specifies the number of characters (converted to bytes) received on the serial port that triggers the node to encapsulate the characters in an IP transport packet and send it over an IES or VPRN service.

Default

1500

Parameters
bytes

the number of characters (in bytes) to trigger sending an IP transport packet

Values

1 to 1500

special-char

Syntax

special-char value

no special-char

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>socket>rx>eop

Description

This command specifies a special character that, if received on the serial port, declares an EOP and triggers the node to encapsulate previously received queued characters in an IP transport packet and send it over an IES or VPRN service.

Note: Other than declaring the EOP, the special character is otherwise treated as regular data; that is, it is added to the packet.

The no form of the command disables checking for a special character.

Default

no special-char

Parameters
value

specifies the special character, in a decimal or hexadecimal format, that triggers end of packet

Values

0 to 255, or 0x00 to 0xFF

squelch-delay

Syntax

squelch-delay seconds

no squelch-delay

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>socket>rx

Description

This command specifies how long a serial port can receive a continuous data stream before an alarm is raised indicating that the serial port has locked up and triggering the squelching function.

The no form of the command disables the squelching function on the serial port.

Default

no squelch-delay

Parameters
seconds

the number of seconds that a serial port can receive data before the squelching function is triggered

Values

1 to 120

squelch-reset

Syntax

squelch-reset

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>socket>rx

Description

This command allows an operator to manually clear squelching on a serial port’s raw socket without having to configure a time limit on the squelching function.

Squelching can also be set to clear automatically after a time limit has been reached with the unsquelch-delay command.

Default

n/a

unsquelch-delay

Syntax

unsquelch-delay seconds

no unsquelch-delay

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>socket>rx

Description

This command clears squelching on a raw socket by setting a limit on the amount of time that squelching can remain active on the port. When the time limit is reached, the auto-clear function is enabled and the serial port’s raw socket is put back into a normal state.

Squelching can also be cleared manually with the squelch-reset command.

The no form of the command disables the auto-clear function on a serial port.

Default

no unsquelch-delay

Parameters
seconds

the number of seconds before the auto-clear function is activated

Values

1 to 120

tx

Syntax

tx

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>socket

Description

This command enables the context to configure parameters for data packets transmitted over a serial port’s raw socket.

inter-session-delay

Syntax

inter-session-delay milliseconds

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>socket>tx

Description

This command specifies a time delay that the node inserts between a session’s data that is being transmitted over a serial port and the next queued session’s data. The next session's data is not sent until the current session's data is sent and the inter-session-delay is reached.

Default

10 ms

Parameters
milliseconds

the time delay, in milliseconds, between a session’s data that is being transmitted over a serial port and the next queued session’s data

Values

0 to 5000

speed

Syntax

speed {600 | 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 8000 | 9600 | | 14400 | 16000 | 19200 | 24000 | 32000 | 38400 | 56000 | 57600 | 64k | 115200}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

Description

This command configures the speed of the interface. The speed also determines the DS0 timeslots assigned to the channel group.

RS-232 interfaces that are functioning as raw sockets support speeds up to 115 200 b/s but do not support 56 000 b/s.

RS-232 interfaces that are not functioning as raw sockets support speeds up to 56 000 b/s.

Speeds of 56 000 b/s and greater are only supported if the device-mode is synchronous (with the exception of raw sockets).

The following speeds are supported only on RS-232 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3; 8000, 14400, 16000, 24000, 32000, and 64k.

Default

9600

Parameters
600

sets the link speed to 600 b/s

1200

sets the link speed to 1200 b/s

2400

sets the link speed to 2400 b/s

4800

sets the link speed to 4800 b/s

8000

sets the link speed to 8000 b/s (only on RS-232 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

9600

sets the link speed to 9600 b/s

14400

sets the link speed to 14 400 b/s (only on RS-232 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

16000

sets the link speed to 16 000 b/s (only on RS-232 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

19200

sets the link speed to 19 200 b/s

24000

sets the link speed to 24 000 b/s (only on RS-232 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

32000

sets the link speed to 32 000 b/s (only on RS-232 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

38400

sets the link speed to 38 400 b/s

56000

sets the link speed to 56 000 b/s (not supported on RS-232 raw sockets)

57600

sets the link speed to 57 600 b/s (supported on RS-232 raw sockets only)

64k

sets the link speed to 64 kb/s (only on RS-232 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

115200

sets the link speed to 115 200 b/s (supported on RS-232 raw sockets only)

speed

Syntax

speed {600 | 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 8000 | 9600 | 14400 | 16000 | 19200 | 32000 | 38400 | 56000 | 64k | 128k | | 192k | 256k | 288k | 336k | 384k | 512k | 640k | 704k | 768k | 896k | 1024k | 1152k | 1280k | 1344k | 1408k | 1536k | 1664k | 1792k |1920k | 2048k | 3072k | 4096k | 5120k | 6144k | 7168k | 8192k | 9216k | 10240k | 11264k | 12288k | 13312k | 14336k | 15360k | 16384k}

Context

config>port>serial>rs530

Description

This command configures the speed of the interface. The speed also determines the DS0 timeslots assigned to the channel group.

Speeds of 56 000 b/s and greater are only supported if the device-mode is synchronous.

Default

64k

Parameters
600

sets the link speed to 600 b/s

1200

sets the link speed to 1200 b/s

2400

sets the link speed to 2400 b/s

4800

sets the link speed to 4800 b/s

8000

sets the link speed to 8000 b/s

9600

sets the link speed to 9600 b/s

14400

sets the link speed to 14 400 b/s

16000

sets the link speed to 16 000 b/s

19200

sets the link speed to 19 200 b/s

32000

sets the link speed to 32 000 b/s

38400

sets the link speed to 38 400 b/s

56000

sets the link speed to 56 000 b/s

64k

sets the link speed to 64 kb/s

128k

sets the link speed to 128 kb/s

192k

sets the link speed to 192 kb/s

256k

sets the link speed to 256 kb/s

288k

sets the link speed to 288 kb/s

336k

sets the link speed to 336 kb/s

384k

sets the link speed to 384 kb/s

512k

sets the link speed to 512 kb/s

640k

sets the link speed to 640 kb/s

704k

sets the link speed to 704 kb/s

768k

sets the link speed to 768 kb/s

896k

sets the link speed to 896 kb/s

1024k

sets the link speed to 1024 kb/s

1152k

sets the link speed to 1152 kb/s

1280k

sets the link speed to 1280 kb/s

1344k

sets the link speed to 1344 kb/s

1408k

sets the link speed to 1408 kb/s

1536k

sets the link speed to 1536 kb/s

1664k

sets the link speed to 1664 kb/s

1792k

sets the link speed to 1792 kb/s

1920k

sets the link speed to 1920 kb/s

2048k

sets the link speed to 2048 kb/s

3072k

sets the link speed to 3072 kb/s

4096k

sets the link speed to 4096 kb/s

5120k

sets the link speed to 5120 kb/s

6144k

sets the link speed to 6144 kb/s

7168k

sets the link speed to 7168 kb/s

8192k

sets the link speed to 8192 kb/s

9216k

sets the link speed to 9216 kb/s

10240k

sets the link speed to 10 240 kb/s

11264k

sets the link speed to 11 264 kb/s

12288k

sets the link speed to 12 288 kb/s

13312k

sets the link speed to 13 312 kb/s

14336k

sets the link speed to 14 336 kb/s

15360k

sets the link speed to 15 360 kb/s

16384k

sets the link speed to 16 384 kb/s

speed

Syntax

speed {56k | 64k | 128k | 192k | 256k | 384k | 512k | 640k | 768k | 896k | 1024k | 1152k | 1280k | 1334k | 1408k | 1536k | 1664k | 1792k |1920k | 2048k | 4096k | 5120k | 7168k}

Context

config>port>serial>v35

Description

This command configures the speed of the interface. The speed also determines the DS0 timeslots assigned to the channel group.

The following speeds are supported only on V.35 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3; 56k, 192k, 1334k, 2048k, 4096k, 5120k, and 7168k.

Default

64k

Parameters
56k

sets the link speed to 56 kb/s (only on V.35 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

64k

sets the link speed to 64 kb/s

128k

sets the link speed to 128 kb/s

192k

sets the link speed to 192 kb/s (only on V.35 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

256k

sets the link speed to 256 kb/s

384k

sets the link speed to 384 kb/s

512k

sets the link speed to 512 kb/s

640k

sets the link speed to 640 kb/s

768k

sets the link speed to 768 kb/s

896k

sets the link speed to 896 kb/s

1024k

sets the link speed to 1024 kb/s

1152k

sets the link speed to 1152 kb/s

1280k

sets the link speed to 1280 kb/s

1334k

sets the link speed to 1334 kb/s (only on V.35 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

1408k

sets the link speed to 1408 kb/s

1536k

sets the link speed to 1536 kb/s

1664k

sets the link speed to 1664 kb/s

1792k

sets the link speed to 1792 kb/s

1920k

sets the link speed to 1920 kb/s

2048

sets the link speed to 2048 kb/s (only on V.35 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

4096k

sets the link speed to 4096 kb/s (only on V.35 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

5120k

sets the link speed to 5120 kb/s (only on V.35 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

7168k

sets the link speed to 7168 kb/s (only on V.35 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

speed

Syntax

speed {1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 56000 | 64k | 128k | 256k | 384k | 512k | 640k | 768k | 896k | 1024k | 1152k | 1280k | 1408k | 1536k | 1664k | 1792k |1920k | 2048k}

Context

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command configures the speed of the interface. The speed also determines the DS0 timeslots assigned to the channel group.

Speeds of 56 000 b/s and greater are only supported if the device-mode is synchronous.

The 2048 kb/s value is supported only on X.21 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3.

Default

64k

Parameters
1200

sets the link speed to 1200 b/s

2400

sets the link speed to 2400 b/s

4800

sets the link speed to 4800 b/s

9600

sets the link speed to 9600 b/s

19200

sets the link speed to 19 200 b/s

38400

sets the link speed to 38 400 b/s

56000

sets the link speed to 56 000 b/s

64k

sets the link speed to 64 kb/s

128k

sets the link speed to 128 kb/s

256k

sets the link speed to 256 kb/s

384k

sets the link speed to 384 kb/s

512k

sets the link speed to 512 kb/s

640k

sets the link speed to 640 kb/s

768k

sets the link speed to 768 kb/s

896k

sets the link speed to 896 kb/s

1024k

sets the link speed to 1024 kb/s

1152k

sets the link speed to 1152 kb/s

1280k

sets the link speed to 1280 kb/s

1408k

sets the link speed to 1408 kb/s

1536k

sets the link speed to 1536 kb/s

1664k

sets the link speed to 1664 kb/s

1792k

sets the link speed to 1792 kb/s

1920k

sets the link speed to 1920 kb/s

2048k

sets the link speed to 2048 kb/s (only supported on X.21 interfaces on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3)

stop-bits

Syntax

stop-bits {1 | 2}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232

config>port>serial>rs530

config>port>serial>x21

Description

This command configures the number of stop bits used to signify the end of a character.

This command is valid only if the device-mode is asynchronous.

This command cannot have a value of 2 if the character-length value is 8 and the parity value is anything other than no parity (that is, anything other than none).

Default

1

Parameters
1

specifies one stop bit in a character

2

specifies two stop bits in a character

RS-232, RS-530, V.35, and X.21 Channel Group Commands

channel-group

Syntax

[no] channel-group channel-group-id

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>channel-group

config>port>serial>rs530>channel-group

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group

Description

This command creates a DS0 channel group on a channelized RS-232, RS-530, V.35, or X.21 circuit.

RS-530 channel groups are only supported on the 12-port Serial Data Interface card, version 3.

Note: When a socket is configured using the socket command, the RS-232 channel-group command is blocked.

Channel groups cannot be further subdivided.

The no form of this command deletes the specified channel group.

Default

n/a

Parameters
channel-group-id

specifies the channel group ID number

Values

RS-232: 1

RS-530: 1

V.35: 1

X.21: 1

crc

Syntax

crc {16 | 32}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>channel-group

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group

Description

This command configures the precision of the cyclic redundancy check. The command is valid only if the encap-type is frame-relay or ipcp.

Default

16

Parameters
16

a 16-bit checksum is used for the channel group

32

a 32-bit checksum is used for the channel group

encap-type

Syntax

encap-type {cem | ipcp | frame-relay | hdlc | cisco-hdlc}

no encap-type

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>channel-group

config>port>serial>rs530>channel-group

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group

Description

This command configures the encapsulation method used for the channel group.

When encap-type is specified, the channel group must be deleted before encap-type can be changed.

The frame-relay, ipcp, hdlc, and cisco-hdlc encapsulation types are not supported on RS-232 or RS-530 interfaces or on ports with subrate speeds (below 64 kb/s). For RS-232 and RS-530 interfaces, only cem is supported.

The no form of this command restores the default value.

Default

no encap-type

Parameters
cem

specifies the encapsulation type as circuit emulation mode

frame-relay

specifies the encapsulation type as frame relay mode

ipcp

specifies the encapsulation type as ipcp mode for a PPP channel group in access mode

hdlc

specifies the encapsulation type as hdlc mode

cisco-hdlc

specifies the encapsulation type as cisco-hdlc mode

idle-cycle-flag

Syntax

idle-cycle-flag {flags | ones}

no idle-cycle-flag

Context

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group

Description

This command defines the value to be transmitted by the channel group during its idle cycle. The command is valid only if the encap-type is frame-relay or ipcp.

Default

flags

Parameters
flags

defines the 8-bit value to be transmitted as 01111110

ones

defines the 8-bit value to be transmitted as 11111111

idle-payload-fill

Syntax

idle-payload-fill {all-ones | pattern}

no idle-payload-fill

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>channel-group

config>port>serial>rs530>channel-group

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group

Description

This command defines the data pattern to be transmitted when the circuit emulation service is not operational or temporarily experiences underrun conditions.

This command is valid only if encap-type is cem.

The no form of this command restores the default value.

Default

all-ones

Parameters
all-ones

defines the 8-bit value to be transmitted as 11111111

pattern

defines the 8-bit value to be transmitted as accepted in decimal, hex or binary format, from 0 to 255

mode

Syntax

mode {access | network}

Context

config>port>serial>rs232>channel-group

config>port>serial>rs530>channel-group

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group

Description

This command configures a channel group for access mode or network operation. Only access mode is supported on serial channels; if the user selects the network option, the CLI returns an error message.

An access port or channel is used for customer-facing traffic on which services are configured. SAPs can only be configured on an access port or channel. When a serial port is configured for access mode, multiple services can be configured on the port.

Default

access

Parameters
access

configures the serial channel as service access

network

configures the serial channel for transport network use

mtu

Syntax

mtu {mtu-bytes}

no mtu

Context

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group

Description

This command defines the maximum MTU size that the channel group can support. The command is valid only if the encap-type is frame-relay or ipcp.

Default

1514 for frame relay

1502 for ipcp

Parameters
mtu-bytes

578 to 2090

ppp

Syntax

[no] ppp

Context

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure the LCP operational parameters for a V.35 or X.21 channel group. This command is available only if the encap-type is set to ipcp and therefore does not apply to RS-232 ports or to X.21 ports configured for subrate speeds.

The no form of the command removes the LCP operational parameters.

Default

no ppp

keepalive

Syntax

keepalive time-interval [dropcount drop-count]

no keepalive

Context

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group>ppp

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group>ppp

Description

This command enables the sending of keepalive messages and configures the time between messages and how many messages can be missed before the link is brought down. The no form of this command disables the sending of keepalive messages.

Default

keepalive 10 dropcount 3

Parameters
time-interval

the time, in seconds, between keepalive messages

Values

1 to 60

drop-count

the number of consecutive failed keepalive request attempts or remote replies that can be missed before the link is operationally brought down

Values

1 to 255

SONET/SDH Port Commands

sonet-sdh

Syntax

sonet-sdh

Context

config>port

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure SONET/SDH ports. This context can only be used when configuring an OC3/OC12 or STM1/STM4 port on an appropriate adapter card.

SONET/SDH ports can be configured on the following adapter cards:

  • 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card

  • 4-port OC3/STM1 Clear Channel Adapter Card

  • 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

clock-source

Syntax

clock-source {loop-timed | node-timed}

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh

Description

This command configures the clock for transmitted data from either the internal clock or from a clock recovered from the line’s receive data stream.

Default

node-timed

Parameters
loop-timed

the link recovers the clock from the received data stream. The 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card does not support loop timing.

node-timed

the link uses the internal clock when transmitting data

framing

Syntax

framing {sonet | sdh}

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh

Description

This command specifies the SONET/SDH framing to be either SONET or SDH.

Changing the framing mode on the 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card causes the adapter card to reset.

Default

sonet

Parameters
sonet

configures the port for SONET framing

sdh

configures the port for SDH framing

group

Syntax

group sonet-sdh-index payload {tu3 | vt2 | vt15}

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh

Description

This command configures the SONET/SDH group payload on a 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card or a 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card.

Default

n/a

Parameters
sonet-sdh-index

specifies the group index for the port on the 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card or 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card configured for OC3. When configured for OC12, the sonet-sdh-index specifies the tug3-index, where index is from 1 to 3.

tu3

specifies the tributary unit group (TUG3) on a path and configures the port or channel for transport network use (supported only on the 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card)

vt2

configures the path as a VT2 type virtual tributary group

vt15

configures the path as a VT1.5 type virtual tributary group

hold-time

Syntax

hold-time {[up hold-time-up] [down hold-time-down]}

no hold-time

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh

Description

This command configures SONET link dampening timers in 100s of milliseconds, to guard against reporting excessive interface transitions. Once implemented, subsequent transitions of the interface from one state to another are not advertised to upper layer protocols until the configured timer has expired.

Default

no hold-time

Parameters
hold-time-up

the hold-timer for link up event dampening. A value of zero (0) indicates that an up transition is reported immediately.

Values

0 to 100 (in 100 ms)

hold-time-down

the hold-timer for link down event dampening. A value of zero (0) indicates that a down transition is reported immediately.

Values

0 to 100 (in 100 ms)

loopback

Syntax

loopback {line | internal}

no loopback

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh

Description

This command activates a loopback on the SONET/SDH port. The SONET port must be in a shutdown state to activate any type of loopback. The loopback setting is never saved to the generated/saved configuration file.

Note: Loopback mode changes on a SONET/SDH port may affect traffic on the remaining ports.
Default

no loopback

Parameters
line

sets the port into a line loopback state. A line loopback loops frames received on the corresponding port back toward the transmit (egress) direction. Line loopbacks are supported on ports configured in network mode.

internal

sets the port into an internal loopback state. An internal loopback loops the frames that are coming in an egress direction from the fabric toward the framer, back to the fabric. This type of loopback is usually referred to as an equipment loopback. Internal loopbacks are supported on ports configured in access mode.

report-alarm

Syntax

[no] report-alarm [loc] [lais] [lrdi] [ss1f] [lb2er-sd] [lb2er-sf] [slof] [slos] [lrei]

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh

Description

This command enables logging of SONET/SDH line and section alarms for a SONET/SDH port. When configured, logging is enabled for the raising and clearing of the specified alarms.

The no form of this command disables logging of the specified alarms.

Parameters
loc

reports a loss of clock that causes the operational state of the port to be shut down

Default

loss of clock alarms are issued

lais

reports line alarm indication signal errors

Default

line alarm indication signal alarms are not issued

lrdi

reports line remote defect indication errors. Line remote defect indication errors are caused by remote loss of frame (LOF), loss of clock (LOC), and loss of signal (LOS) conditions.

Default

line remote defect indication alarms are issued

ss1f

reports section synchronization failure, which is detected when the S1 byte is not consistent for eight consecutive frames. When configured, ss1f alarms are raised and cleared. Although this option is shown on the CLI, it is not available for use on the 7705 SAR.

Default

section synchronization failure alarms are not issued

lb2er-sd

reports line signal degradation BER (bit interleaved parity) errors

Default

line signal degradation BER alarms are not issued

lb2er-sf

reports line signal failure BER errors

Default

line signal failure BER alarms are issued

slof

reports section loss of frame errors

Default

section loss of frame alarms are issued

slos

reports a section loss of signal error on the transmit side

Default

section loss of signal alarms are issued

lrei

reports a line error condition raised by the remote end as a result of b1 errors received from this node. When configured, line error alarms are raised but not cleared.

Default

line error alarms are not issued

section-trace

Syntax

section-trace {increment-z0 | byte value | string string}

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh

Description

This command configures the section trace bytes in the SONET section header to interoperate with some older versions of ADMs or regenerators that require an incremental STM ID. You can explicitly configure an incremental STM value rather than a static one in the SDH overhead by specifying an increment-z0 value.

The increment-z0 parameter is not supported on the 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card.

Default

byte 0x1

Parameters
increment-z0

configures an incremental STM ID instead of a static value

value

sets values in SONET header bytes

Values

0 to 255 or 0x00 to 0xFF

Default

0x1

string

specifies a text string that identifies the section

Values

a string up to 16 bytes

speed

Syntax

speed {oc3 | oc12}

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh

Description

This command configures the speed of a SONET/SDH port.

Although the oc3 option is shown in the CLI, it is not configurable. And, although the oc12 option is shown in the CLI, it is not available for use on the 7705 SAR. Users can change between oc3 and oc12 on the 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card by using the mda-mode keyword in the config>card>mda context and selecting either the p4-oc3 or p1-oc12 option. The adapter card automatically reboots to make the change.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

oc3

Parameters
oc3

sets the speed of the port to OC3

oc12

sets the speed of the port to OC12 (not available on the 7705 SAR)

threshold

Syntax

threshold {ber-sd | ber-sf} rate threshold-rate

no threshold {ber-sd | ber-sf}

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh

Description

This command configures the line signal (b2) degradation bit error rate (BER) and line signal failure thresholds.

Alarms are raised if the line signal bit interleaved parity error rates exceed either the degradation or failure thresholds. If the failure threshold is crossed, the link will be set to operationally down.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

threshold ber-sd 6 - signal degrade BER threshold of 10-6

threshold ber-sf 3 - signal failure BER threshold of 10-3

Parameters
ber-sd

specifies the BER for signal degradation

ber-sf

specifies the BER for signal failure

threshold-rate

specifies the BER negative exponent (n in 10-n), expressed as a decimal integer

Values

3 to 9 (10-3 to 10-9)

tx-dus

Syntax

[no] tx-dus

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh

Description

This command allows the Quality Level (QL) value transmitted from the Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) channel of a SONET/SDH port to be set to QL-DUS/QL-DNU (do not use for synchronization for timing purposes).

Default

no tx-dus

SONET/SDH Path Commands

path

Syntax

[no] path [sonet-sdh-index]

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh

Description

This command defines the SONET/SDH path.

The no form of this command removes the specified SONET/SDH path.

Default

no index is specified

Parameters
sonet-sdh-index

specifies the components making up the SONET/SDH path. Depending on the SONET/SDH adapter card and the type of SONET/SDH port, the sonet-sdh-index must specify one or more path indexes to identify the payload location of the path. The CLI uses the same sonet-sdh-index syntax nomenclature to configure SONET and SDH paths.

In addition, the support of virtual tributary circuits adds another level of complexity and several levels of indexes, which means that one or more path commands may be needed to set up the container in the path.

On the 4-port OC3/STM1 Clear Channel Adapter card, sonet-sdh-index is optional; if used, the value must be sts3.

Values

sts12, sts3, sts1, tu3, vt2, vt15 sonet-sdh-index

See SONET/SDH Channelized Port ID, Configuring SONET/SDH Port Parameters and SONET/SDH Channelized Port Configuration Examples for more information and examples.

crc

Syntax

crc {16 | 32}

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

Description

This command specifies a cyclic redundancy check on a SONET/SDH path on a SONET/SDH port.

Default

32 (if the encap-type is set to atm; this default cannot be changed)

16 (if the encap-type is set to ppp-auto; port is configured for POS)

Parameters
16

specifies that a 16-bit checksum be used for the associated port/channel

32

specifies that a 32-bit checksum be used for the associated port/channel

encap-type

Syntax

encap-type {atm | ppp-auto}

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

Description

This command configures the encapsulation method used to distinguish customer traffic on a SONET/SDH path on a SONET/SDH port.

The encap-type of atm is used for access mode (4-port OC3/STM1 Clear Channel Adapter card and 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card), and the encap-type of ppp-auto is used for network mode (4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card).

When encap-type is atm, the crc default of 32 cannot be changed.

When encap-type is atm, ATM sublayer verification specified in GR-1248-CORE, Generic Requirements for Operations of ATM Network Elements, is automatically enabled. The result of the verification includes:

  • Out of Cell Delineation (OCD) event count — the OCD event count is described in RFC 2515, Definitions of Managed Objects for ATM Management. Multiple events occurring within 1 s will be counted as one event for ATM and ASAP adapter cards as a result of a hardware limit.

  • Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) defect/alarm — the LCD defect/alarm is defined in RFC 2515, Definitions of Managed Objects for ATM Management. When a path is in an LCD defect state, the path’s operational status is down. When a path exits the LCD state, the path’s operational status will change to up (assuming nothing else causes the path to stay down). A trap is raised to indicate the LCD status change, and a Path Remote Defect Indicator (PRDI) is sent to indicate the defect to the remote end.

To change the encap-type, the path must first be removed and then recreated with the new encap-type. For example, to change the encap-type from atm to ppp-auto:

CLI Syntax:
config>port>sonet-sdh>path# back
config>port>sonet-sdh# no path
config>port>sonet-sdh# path
config>port>sonet-sdh>path# mode network
config>port>sonet-sdh>path# encap-type ppp-auto
config>port>sonet-sdh>path#
Default

no encap-type

Parameters
atm

specifies that the encapsulation on the port is ATM

ppp-auto

enables PPP on the associated port or channel. The activation of IPCP and MPLSCP is automatic depending on the protocol configuration.

mode

Syntax

mode {access | network}

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

Description

This command configures the mode of operation for a SONET/SDH port or channel on a 4-port OC3/STM1 Clear Channel Adapter card or 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card.

An access port or channel is used for customer-facing traffic on which services are configured. A Service Access Point (SAP) can only be configured on an access port or channel. When a port or channel on the 4-port OC3/STM1 Clear Channel Adapter card is configured for access mode, the encap-type must be set to atm. The 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card does not support ATM when configured for access mode.

A network port or channel configured for Packet over SONET (POS) is used as an uplink to connect to the packet network and transport the configured services. When a port or channel is configured for network mode, the encap-type must be set to ppp-auto.

To change the mode, the path must first be removed and then recreated with the new mode. For example, to change the mode from access to network:

CLI Syntax:
config>port>sonet-sdh>path# back
config>port>sonet-sdh# no path
config>port>sonet-sdh# path
config>port>sonet-sdh>path# mode network
config>port>sonet-sdh>path#
Default

access

Parameters
access

configures the port or channel for access mode

network

configures the port or channel for network mode

mtu

Syntax

mtu mtu

no mtu

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

Description

This command configures the maximum payload MTU size for a SONET/SDH port on a 4-port OC3/STM1 Clear Channel Adapter card. When encap-type is atm, the path MTU value cannot be changed. Refer to the 7705 SAR Services Guide, ‟Global Service Command Reference”, for information on configuring the path MTU.

The no form of this command restores the default value.

Default

1524 (for access mode)

1572 (for network mode)

Parameters
mtu

sets the maximum allowable size of the MTU, expressed as an integer

Values

578 to 2090 (in bytes)

payload

Syntax

payload {sts12 | sts3 | tug3 | ds3 | e3 | vt2 | vt15 | ds1 | e1}

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

Description

This command configures the SONET/SDH path on a channelized adapter card (2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card or 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card) as an asynchronous circuit or a virtual tributary group.

Default

n/a

Parameters
sts12

configures the STS12/STM4 (OC12/OC3) payload as clear channel

sts3

configures the STS3/STM1 payload as clear channel

tug3

configures the STS3/STM1 payload as tributary unit group 3 (TUG3)

ds3

configures the port or channel as D3 STS1/VC3

e3

configures the VC3 payload as E3

vt2

configures the STS1 payload as virtual tributary group 2

vt15

configures the path as virtual tributary group 1.5

ds1

configures the port or channel VT1.5 or VT2 payload as DS1

e1

configures the VT2 payload as E1

ppp

Syntax

ppp

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure the Link Control Protocol (LCP) operational parameters for a Packet over Sonet (POS) Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) link on a 4-port OC3/STM1 Clear Channel Adapter card.

Default

n/a

keepalive

Syntax

keepalive time-interval [dropcount drop-count]

no keepalive

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh>path>ppp

Description

This command enables the sending of keepalive echo messages on a 4-port OC3/STM1 Clear Channel Adapter card and configures the time between messages and how many reports can be missed before the link is brought down.

The no form of this command disables the sending of echo requests.

Default

keepalive 10 dropcount 3

Parameters
time-interval

the time interval, in seconds, that echo requests are issued

Values

1 to 60

Default

10

drop-count

the number of keepalive messages that can be missed before the link is brought down

Values

1 to 255

Default

3

report-alarm

Syntax

[no] report-alarm [pais] [plop] [prdi] [pplm] [prei] [puneq] [plcd]

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

Description

This command enables logging of SONET/SDH path alarms for a SONET/SDH port.

The no form of this command disables logging of the specified alarms.

Parameters
pais

reports path alarm indication signal errors. When configured, path alarm indication signal alarms are raised and cleared.

Default

path alarm indication signal alarms are not issued

plop

reports path loss of pointer errors, per tributary. When configured, path loss of pointer alarms are raised but not cleared.

Default

path loss of pointer alarms are issued

prdi

reports path remote defect indication errors. When configured, path remote defect indication alarms are raised and cleared.

Default

path remote defect indication alarms are not issued

pplm

reports a path payload mismatch, which places the channel operationally down. When configured, path payload mismatch alarms are raised but not cleared.

Default

path payload mismatch alarms are issued

prei

reports a path error condition raised by the remote end as a result of b3 errors received from this node. When configured, path error alarms are raised but not cleared. (This parameter is not supported on the 4-port OC3/STM1 card.)

Default

path error alarms are not issued

puneq

reports path unequipped errors

Default

path unequipped alarms are issued

plcd

reports path loss of code group delineation errors. It is applicable only when the value of xgig is set to WAN. Although this option is shown on the CLI, it is not available for use on the 7705 SAR.

Default

path loss of code traps are not issued

scramble

Syntax

[no] scramble

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

Description

This command enables SONET/SDH payload scrambling on a 4-port OC3/STM1 Clear Channel Adapter card.

Scrambling randomizes the pattern of 1s and 0s carried in a SONET frame. Scrambling, or rearranging, the pattern prevents continuous strings of all 1s or all 0s and meets the needs of physical layer protocols that rely on sufficient transitions between 1s and 0s to maintain clocking.

For ATM, this command enables or disables ATM cell-level payload scrambling or descrambling using the x43+1 polynomial as defined in ITU-T I.432.1. Scrambling is enabled by default for the ATM path or channel. This scrambling is done in addition to SONET/SDH frame scrambling or descrambling, which is always enabled in the framer.

The no form of this command disables scrambling.

Default

scramble

signal-label

Syntax

signal-label value

no signal-label

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

Description

This command sets the C2 byte value. The purpose of this byte is to communicate the payload type being encapsulated by SONET framing.

Default

0xcf

Parameters
value

specifies the C2 byte value, expressed as a decimal integer or a hexadecimal value

Values

1 to 254 or 0x01 to 0xfe

trace-string

Syntax

trace-string [trace-string]

no trace-string

Context

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

Description

This command specifies the path trace identifier for the circuit that is continuously inserted at source. This identifier corresponds to J1 or J2 in the SONET/SDH overhead, depending on the associated path. The specified trace string can be checked against the expected value by the receiver. If no trace string is entered, a null string is used.

The no form of this command resets the string to its default.

Default

The default path trace value is ALU 7705 SAR. The value does not change when the encap-type changes. The path trace string contains all zeros for a non-provisioned path.

Parameters
trace-string

specifies an alphanumeric string value. If the string contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks.

Values

1 to 62 bytes for SONET or 1 to 15 bytes for SDH

Network Port Commands

network

Syntax

network

Context

config>port>ethernet

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>ds3

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e3

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure network port parameters.

Default

n/a

accounting-policy

Syntax

accounting-policy policy-id

no accounting-policy

Context

config>port>ethernet>network

config>port>sonet-sdh>path>network

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>network

config>port>tdm>ds3>network

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>network

config>port>tdm>e3>network

Description

This command configures an accounting policy that can apply to an interface.

An accounting policy must be configured before it can be associated to an interface. If the accounting policy-id does not exist, an error is returned.

Accounting policies associated with service billing can only be applied to SAPs. Accounting policies associated with network ports can only be associated with interfaces. Only one accounting policy can be associated with an interface at a time.

No accounting policies are specified by default. You must explicitly specify a policy. If configured, the accounting policy configured as the default under the config>log>accounting-policy>default command is used.

The no form of this command removes the accounting policy association from the network interface, and the accounting policy reverts to the default.

Default

n/a

Parameters
policy-id

specifies the accounting policy-id of an existing policy. Accounting policies record either service (access) or network information. A network accounting policy can only be associated with the network port configurations. Accounting policies are configured in the config>log>accounting-policy context.

Values

1 to 99

collect-stats

Syntax

[no] collect-stats

Context

config>port>ethernet>network

config>port>sonet-sdh>path>network

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>network

config>port>tdm>ds3>network

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>network

config>port>tdm>e3>network

Description

This command enables the collection of accounting and statistical data for the network interface. When applying accounting policies, the data, by default, is collected in the appropriate records and written to the designated billing file.

When the no collect-stats command is issued, the statistics are still accumulated by the adapter cards. However, the CPU does not obtain the results and write them to the billing file. If the collect-stats command is issued again (enabled), then the counters written to the billing file will include the traffic collected while the no collect-stats command was in effect.

Default

no collect-stats

egress

Syntax

egress

Context

config>port>ethernet>network

Description

This command enables access to the context to assign network egress parameters.

Default

n/a

shaper-policy

Syntax

shaper-policy name

no shaper-policy

Context

config>port>ethernet>network>egress

Description

This command assigns a shaper policy to the specified port.

The shaper policy defines shaper parameters such as shaper group, and PIR and CIR rates. The shaper policy is defined in the config>qos>shaper-policy context. Refer to the 7705 SAR Quality of Service Guide, ‟QoS for Hybrid Ports”, for more information.

Note:

  • The port shaper rate applies to the bulk of access and network traffic. Thus, once the configured egress shaper rate is reached, both the access and network traffic scheduling pauses.

  • For hybrid ports, there can be a single shaper policy on access egress and a single shaper policy on network egress. Therefore, all the SAP traffic and all the network traffic is each bound to its own shaper group in the shaper policy (access and network shaper policy, respectively). In other words, shaped SAPs and the bulk/aggregate of unshaped SAPs are shaped together as per the shaper policy assigned to the access egress. A similar behavior applies to network traffic, where the shaped interfaces and the bulk/aggregate of unshaped interfaces are shaped together as per the shaper policy assigned to the network egress.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

‟default”

Parameters
name

specifies an existing shaper policy name

unshaped-if-cir

Syntax

unshaped-if-cir cir-rate

no unshaped-if-cir

Context

config>port>ethernet>network>egress

Description

This command sets the CIR rate for the aggregate of all the unshaped VLANs (that is, network interfaces) on the port. The default cir-rate is 0 kb/s. When the cir-rate is set to max, the CIR rate adopts the maximum rate of the port. The actual rate of the port is dictated by the physical port speed, which can be overwritten by the egress-rate sub-rate command.

If the cir-rate is higher than the sub-rate, the cir-rate is stored in the configuration database but the sub-rate limit is used.

On Gen-3 hardware, the cir-rate for this command can be configured and is applied but has no effect on the network port, except for network traffic in hybrid mode, where the cir-rate value has an effect.

The no form of the command sets the unshaped-if-cir CIR rate to 0 kb/s.

Default

no unshaped-if-cir

Parameters
cir-rate

the CIR rate for the aggregate of all the unshaped VLANs on the port

Values

0 to 10000000 kb/s, or max

Default

0 kb/s

queue-policy

Syntax

queue-policy name

no queue-policy

Context

config>port>ethernet>network

config>port>sonet-sdh>path>network

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>network

config>port>tdm>ds3>network

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>network

config>port>tdm>e3>network

Description

This command specifies the network queue policy that defines queue parameters such as CBS-priority-only burst size, MBS, CIR, and PIR rates, as well as FC-to-queue mappings. The network queue policy is defined in the config>qos>network-queue context. Refer to the 7705 SAR Quality of Service Guide, ‟Network Queue QoS Policies”, for more information.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

‟default”

Parameters
name

specifies an existing network queue policy name

scheduler-mode

Syntax

scheduler-mode {16-priority}

Context

config>port>ethernet>network

Description

This command selects the network-side scheduling option for the following:

  • 8-port Gigabit Ethernet Adapter card

  • 10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card

  • 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card

  • 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module

  • 4-port SAR-H Fast Ethernet module
  • 6-port SAR-M Ethernet module
  • Packet Microwave Adapter card

  • Ethernet ports on the 7705 SAR-A, 7705 SAR-Ax, 7705 SAR-H, 7705 SAR-Hc, 7705 SAR-M, and 7705 SAR-Wx

On these Ethernet adapter cards, modules, and platforms, scheduler-mode can only be configured to 16-priority. On the 6-port Ethernet 10Gbps Adapter card and the 7705 SAR-X, scheduler-mode is permanently set to support 4-priority and is not user-configurable.

Default

16-priority —8-port Gigabit Ethernet Adapter card, 10-port 1GigE/1-port 10GigE X-Adapter card, 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) Adapter card, 2-port 10GigE (Ethernet) module, 4-port SAR-H Fast Ethernet Module, 6-port SAR-M Ethernet module, Packet Microwave Adapter card, 7705 SAR-A, 7705 SAR-Ax, 7705 SAR-H, 7705 SAR-Hc, 7705 SAR-M, and 7705 SAR-Wx Ethernet ports (cannot be changed)

Parameters
16-priority

sets the 16-priority scheduling option for the cards, modules, and platforms listed under Default

Multilink Bundle and IMA Group Commands

Note: Unless otherwise specified, references to multilink bundles refer to both multilink (MLPPP) bundles and IMA groups.

multilink-bundle

Syntax

[no] multilink-bundle

Context

config>port

Description

This command enables the context to configure bundle properties for this bundle port.

Default

n/a

fragment-threshold

Syntax

fragment-threshold fragment-threshold

no fragment-threshold

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle

Description

This command sets the maximum length (in bytes) of a fragment transmitted across the specified MLPPP bundle or sets the length of a Tx frame across the specified IMA group bundle in ATM cells.

The no form of this command resets the fragment threshold back to the default value.

Default

128

Parameters
fragment-threshold

specifies the maximum fragment length in bytes (for MLPPP bundles) or the Tx frame size (for IMA bundles)

Values

128 to 512 bytes (MLPPP)

128 bytes (IMA)

member

Syntax

[no] member port-id

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle

Description

This command binds a channel group to a multilink bundle.

To bind a channel group to a multilink bundle, all the timeslots on the channel group must be allocated.

When you configure a channel group on the network side with ppp-auto encapsulation, the system automatically allocates all timeslots to the channel group. When you configure a channel group on the access side with IPCP encapsulation, the system does not automatically allocate all timeslots to the channel group. In order to use the port or channel group as a member in an multilink bundle, you must manually allocate all the timeslots to the channel group before adding it to the bundle.

The following list specifies the cards, modules, and platforms that support multilink bundles and the number of channel groups on the network and/or access side that can be bound to an MLPPP bundle:

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-A

    Network: 8 Access: 8

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-M

    Network: 16 Access: 8

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-X

    Network: 8 Access: 8

    The following must have all member links of an MLPPP bundle configured on the same card or module:

    • 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

      Network: 16 Access: 8

    • 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

      Network: 16 Access: 8

    • T1/E1 ports on the 4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module (on 7705 SAR-H)

      Network: 2 Access: 2

    The following must have all member links of an MLPPP bundle configured on the same card or module, and on the same port:

    • 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

      Network: 8 Access: 8

    • 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card

      Network: 8 Access: 8

The following list specifies the cards, modules, and platforms that support IMA groups and the number of channel groups on the network and/or access side that can be bound to an IMA group:

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-M

    IMA: 16

    The following must have all member links of an IMA bundle configured on the same card or module:

    • 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

      IMA: 16

    • 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

      IMA: 16

    The following must have all member links of an IMA bundle configured on the same card or module, and on the same port:

    • 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

      IMA: 8

The no form of this command removes the specified channel group from the multilink bundle.

Default

n/a

Parameters
port-id

the physical port ID in the format slot/mda/port.channel

minimum-links

Syntax

minimum-links minimum-links

no minimum-links

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle

Description

This command sets the minimum number of links that must be active for the bundle to be active.

If the number of active links drops below the configured minimum, then the multilink bundle will transition to an operationally down state.

The following table lists the minimum link limits for the supported adapter cards, modules, and platforms.

Table 6. Minimum Link Limit Values

Port

MLPP Bundles

IMA Bundles

Access

Network

Access

T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-A

1 to 8

1 to 8

T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-M

1 to 8

1 to 16

1 to 16

T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-X

1 to 8

1 to 8

T1/E1 ports on the 4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module (on 7705 SAR-H)

1 to 2

1 to 2

DS1/E1 channels on the 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

1 to 8

1 to 8

1 to 8

4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card

1 to 8

16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

1 to 8

1 to 16

1 to 16

32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

1 to 8

1 to 16

1 to 16

The no form of this command removes the minimum link limit.

Default

1

Parameters
minimum-links

the minimum link limit, expressed as an integer

Values

see Minimum Link Limit Values

mlppp

Syntax

mlppp

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle

Description

This command enables the context to configure MLPPP bundle attributes.

endpoint-discriminator

Syntax

endpoint-discriminator class {ip-address | global-mac-address | null} [discriminator-id discriminator-id]

no endpoint-discriminator

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle>mlppp

Description

This command configures the endpoint-discriminator class and ID. The port must be shut down to modify the endpoint-discriminator parameters.

If the null option is configured, the 7705 SAR will advertise an endpoint-discriminator class value of NULL in link membership negotiations. If the far-end node rejects the NULL object, the 7705 SAR will remove the object from future requests. The null option should only be used if the far-end node cannot support the ip-address or global-mac-address endpoint-discriminator class options, as these options provide more protection from incorrectly adding a link to an MLPPP bundle.

The no form of this command removes the configured parameters.

Parameters
class

specifies the link control protocol endpoint-discriminator class field

Default

global-mac-address (for physical MLPPP bundle)

ip-address (for physical MLPPP bundle protection group)

null (when the endpoint-discriminator option is not present in a received configure request)

discriminator-id

specifies the endpoint-discriminator identifier value within the specified endpoint-discriminator class

Values

any valid IP address

magic-number

Syntax

[no] magic-number

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle>mlppp

Description

This command allows loopback detection to be enabled and disabled for MLPPP bundles. The command is disabled by default. When the magic number option is disabled, the magic number option will not be requested when a member is trying to bring up the LCP layer on a member link; if the remote peer requests this option, it will be rejected. When transmitting echo-requests, a magic number of 0 is used. When responding to echo-requests, a magic number of 0 is sent.

If the magic-number option is enabled, the option is sent to the remote peer during protocol negotiation. If this option is rejected by the remote peer, the router will bring the link up but will be unable to detect loopbacks since the router will always send a magic number of 0 in the echo messages upon rejection. If this option is accepted by the remote peer, the router will send echo messages with randomly generated (non-zero) magic numbers. If the 7705 SAR receives a config-req with the same magic number that was sent out, the router will calculate a new magic number to use and send out another config-request. If the router persistently sees the randomly generated magic number in the received config-req, the router will declare a loopback.

The no form of the command disables the loopback detection.

Default

no magic-number

multiclass

Syntax

multiclass count

no multiclass

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle>mlppp

Description

This command enables multi-class MLPPP (MC-MLPPP) as defined by RFC 2686, The Multi-Class Extension to Multi-Link PPP. The 7705 SAR supports MC-MLPPP bundles with 2, 3 or 4 classes. To change the number of classes, all member links must be removed and then the bundle must be shut down.

The packets transmitted on the MC-MLPPP bundle are sent with class values from 0 to one less than the configured class size. For example, a 4-class MLPPP bundle has 4 classes and transmits packets with class numbers 0, 1, 2, and 3. A 4-class bundle transmits packets with class numbers 0, 1 and 2 and a 2-class bundle transmits packets with class numbers 0 and 1. A 0-class MLPPP bundle has the highest priority.

Entries are created and deleted by the system depending on the number of classes being used by a given MLPPP bundle. The no form of the command disables multi-class MLPPP.

Default

no multiclass

Parameters
count

specifies the number of classes in an MLPPP bundle

Values

2 to 4

mrru

Syntax

mrru mrru

no mrru

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle

Description

This command specifies the maximum received reconstructed unit (MRRU), which is similar to a maximum transmission unit (MTU) but applies only to MLPPP multilink bundles. The MRRU is the maximum frame size that can be reconstructed from multilink fragments. This command is only valid for MLPPP bundles.

The no form of this command resets the MRRU to the default.

Default

1524

Parameters
mrru

the maximum received reconstructed unit size, expressed as an integer

Values

1500 to 2088 bytes (for MLPPP)

1500 to 2090 bytes (for PPP)

red-differential-delay

Syntax

red-differential-delay red-diff-delay [down]

no red-differential-delay

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle

Description

This command sets the maximum acceptable differential delay for individual circuits within a multilink bundle.

The no form of this command restores the red-differential-delay defaults.

Default

n/a

Parameters
red-diff-delay

the maximum red differential delay value, in milliseconds

Values

0 to 25 ms for MLPPP bundles

2 to 75 ms for IMA bundles on the 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card or 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

2 to 75 ms for IMA bundles on the 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

down

transition the circuit that exceeded the differential delay to a down state (for example, remove it from the multilink bundle from an operational perspective). To transition the circuit back to the up state, the user should shutdown, then no shutdown the channel group.

short-sequence

Syntax

[no] short-sequence

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle

Description

This command specifies that the MLPPP bundle should use short (12 bit) sequence numbers instead of the default 24-bit sequence number. This command is only valid for MLPPP bundles.

The no form of this command disables the short-sequence feature.

Default

no short-sequence

yellow-differential-delay

Syntax

yellow-differential-delay yellow-diff-delay

no yellow-differential-delay

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle

Description

This command sets the yellow warning threshold for the differential delay for members within a multilink bundle. If circuit’s delay exceeds the yellow-differential delay value, a log message and SNMP trap is sent. This command is only valid for MLPPP bundles.

The no form of this command removes the yellow-differential-delay.

Default

n/a

Parameters
yellow-diff-delay

the maximum yellow differential delay threshold value, in milliseconds

Values

1 to 25

ima

Syntax

ima

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle

Description

This command enables the context to configure parameters for an IMA group. An IMA group is a collection of physical links bundled together and assigned to an ATM port. IMA enables a high-speed channel that is composed of ATM cells to be transported as a number of lower-speed circuits. They are then reassembled as the original high-speed ATM channel.

This command is only valid for IMA bundles.

link-delay

Syntax

link-delay {activate | deactivate} milliseconds

no link-delay {activate | deactivate}

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle>ima

Description

This command specifies the time delay between detection of a link activation/deactivation condition and acting upon it (going in/out of the Rx failure state on a link).

Parameters
activate milliseconds

the time, in milliseconds, used to clear an existing LIF, LODS, or FRI-IMA alarm. The time specified determines how long is needed for member links to stabilize before being activated.

Values

1 to 30000 ms

Default

1000

deactivate milliseconds

the time, in milliseconds, used to raise an LIF, LODS, or FRI-IMA alarm. The time specified determines how long before a member link is declared in error and is deactivated.

Values

1 to 30000 ms

Default

2000

test-pattern-procedure

Syntax

test-pattern-procedure

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle>ima

Description

This command enables the context to configure IMA test pattern procedures. This command and its sub-commands are not saved in the router configuration between reboots.

test-link

Syntax

test-link port-id

no test-link

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle>ima>test-pattern-procedure

Description

This command specifies IMA members on which an IMA test pattern procedure is to be performed.

The no form of this command deletes the link from the test-pattern procedure. The test-pattern procedure must be shut down first.

Default

no test-link

Parameters
port-id

the port ID to be used to verify link connectivity within an IMA group

test-pattern

Syntax

test-pattern pattern

no test-pattern

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle>ima>test-pattern-procedure

Description

This command specifies the transmit test pattern in an IMA group loopback operation. This value can only be changed when the test-pattern-procedure command is shut down.

The no form of this command restores the test pattern to the default.

Default

0

Parameters
pattern

specifies an integer taking the following values:

Values

0 to 255

shutdown

Syntax

[no] shutdown

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle>ima>test-pattern-procedure

Description

This command enables a configured IMA test pattern procedure.

The no form of this command disables the IMA test pattern procedure.

version

Syntax

version IMA-version

no version

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle>ima>

Description

This command configures the IMA version for the multilink bundle group. If there is a version mismatch between this IMA group and the far-end IMA group, the IMA group will go operationally down. To change the IMA version, you must first remove all member links from the group.

Only IMA version 1.1 is supported.

Default

1-1

Parameters
IMA-version

specifies the IMA version for this group

Values

1-1 — IMA version 1.1

ATM Interface Commands

atm

Syntax

atm

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle>ima

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>ds3

config>port>tdm>e3

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

Description

This command enables the context to configure ATM interface properties.

cell-format

Syntax

cell-format cell-format

no cell-format

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle>ima>atm

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>atm

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>atm

config>port>tdm>ds3>atm

config>port>tdm>e3>atm

config>port>sonet-sdh>path>atm

Description

This command configures the ATM cell format.

The no form of this command restores the default value.

Default

uni

Parameters
cell-format

the ATM cell format, either UNI or NNI (SONET/SDH ports do not support the NNI format)

Values

uni (user-to-network interface cell format)

nni (network-to-network interface cell format)

mapping

Syntax

mapping direct

no mapping

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3>atm

Description

This command specifies the ATM cell mapping to be used on this DS3 ATM interface.

The no form of this command restores the default value.

Note: For an E3 interface, the mapping command does not appear in the CLI; the interface is hard-coded for direct mapping.
Default

direct

Parameters
direct

specifies direct cell mapping

min-vp-vpi

Syntax

min-vp-vpi value

no min-vp-vpi

Context

config>port>multilink-bundle>ima>atm

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>atm

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>atm

config>port>tdm>ds3>atm

config>port>tdm>e3>atm

config>port>sonet-sdh>path>atm

Description

This command sets the minimum allowable virtual path identifier (VPI) value that can be used on the ATM interface for a virtual path connection (VPC).

The no form of this command restores the default value.

Default

0

Parameters
value

the minimum allowable VPI value that can be used on the ATM interface for a VPC

Values

0 to 4095 (NNI) (not supported on SDH/SONET ports)

0 to 255 (UNI)

TDM Commands

tdm

Syntax

tdm

Context

config>port

Description

This command enables the context to configure:

  • DS1/E1 parameters for a port on a channelized 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card, 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card, 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card, 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card, or 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card (DS3 ports only)

  • DS3 parameters for a port on a channelized 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

  • DS3/E3 parameters for a port on a 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card

  • codirectional and teleprotection interfaces (TPIF) parameters for a port on an 8-port Voice & Teleprotection card

  • teleprotection interfaces (TPIF) parameters for a port on an 8-port C37.94 Teleprotection card

TDM is a mechanism that divides the bandwidth of a stream into separate channels or timeslots by assigning each stream a different timeslot in a set. TDM repeatedly transmits a fixed sequence of timeslots over a single transmission channel. Each individual data stream is reassembled at the receiving end based on the timing.

Default

n/a

buildout

Syntax

buildout {long | short}

Context

config>port>tdm

Description

This command specifies the line buildout (cable length) for physical DS1 ports on the 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card or 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card, or for physical DS3/E3 ports on the 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card.

Default

short (this is the only option available for the 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card and 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card)

Parameters
long

sets the line buildout for length runs up to 450 ft (for the 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card only)

short

sets the line buildout for length runs up to 225 ft (for the 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card only) or up to 655 ft (for the 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card and 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card)

codir

Syntax

[no] codir

Context

config>port>tdm

Description

This command creates a 64 kb/s codirectional G.703 channel on a port on the 8-port Voice & Teleprotection card.

The no form of this command deletes the port’s codirectional channel.

Default

n/a

channel-group

Syntax

[no] channel-group channel-group-id

Context

config>port>tdm>codir

config>port>tdm>tpif

Description

This command creates a DS0 channel group on a TDM interface on the 8-port Voice & Teleprotection card or 8-port C37.94 Teleprotection card.

The no form of this command deletes the port’s codirectional or TPIF channel group.

Default

n/a

Parameters
channel-group-id

specifies the channel group ID number

Values

1

encap-type

Syntax

encap-type cem

Context

config>port>tdm>codir>channel-group

config>port>tdm>tpif>channel-group

Description

This command specifies the encapsulation type. The channel group must be deleted before changing the encapsulation type.

Default

no encap-type

Parameters
cem

circuit emulation (TDM)

mode

Syntax

mode access

Context

config>port>tdm>codir>channel-group

config>port>tdm>tpif>channel-group

Description

This command configures the interface for access mode. An access port or channel is used for customer-facing traffic. A Service Access Point (SAP) can only be configured on an access port or channel. When an interface is configured for access mode, the appropriate encapsulation type must be specified.

Default

access

Parameters
access

configures the port as service access

framing

Syntax

framing {framed | unframed}

no framing

Context

config>port>tdm>tpif

Description

This command configures framing on a C37.94 port in a TPIF VC.

If the VC is configured for unstructured circuit emulation (satop-tpif) (only supported on the odd-numbered ports on the 8-port C37.94 Teleprotection card), the framing mode must be set to unframed.

The no form of this command removes the configuration.

Default

no framing

Parameters
framed

configures the port for framing

unframed

configures the port for unframed mode

loopback

Syntax

loopback {internal | line}

no loopback

Context

config>port>tdm>codir

config>port>tdm>tpif

Description

This command puts the specified interface into a loopback mode. The port must be shut down before loopback mode is enabled.

This command is not saved in the system configuration between boots.

The no form of this command disables the loopback on the interface.

Default

no loopback

Parameters
internal

places the port or channel into an internal loopback mode. An internal loopback loops the frames from the local router back to the framer.

line

places the port or channel into a line loopback mode. A line loopback loops data received on the port or channel back to the remote end.

report-alarm

Syntax

report-alarm {ais | los | rai}

no report-alarm

Context

config>port>tdm>codir

config>port>tdm>tpif

Description

This command enables logging of codirectional and TPIF alarms for the specified interface or channel.

The no form of this command disables logging of the specified alarm.

Default

ais for codir

rai for tpif

Parameters
ais

reports alarm indication signal errors (configurable for codir only)

los

reports loss of signal errors

rai

reports remote alarm indication signal errors (configurable for tpif only)

timing-8k

Syntax

[no] timing-8k

Context

config>port>tdm>codir

Description

This command enables generation of an 8-kHz signal on a codirectional interface.

Default

disabled

ds1

Syntax

[no] ds1 ds1-id

Context

config>port>tdm

Description

This command enables the context to configure DS1 frame parameters on a channelized 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card, 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card, 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card, 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card, or 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card (DS3 ports only).

T1 transmits DS1-formatted data at 1.544 Mb/s through the network.

Once a channel has been configured for DS1, all ports on the card can only be configured for DS1. There cannot be a mix of DS1 and E1 channels on the same card.

The no form of this command deletes the specified DS1 channel.

Default

n/a

Parameters
ds1-id

the identifier of the DS1 channel

Values

DS1 number (1 to 28) | ds1-sonet-sdh-index

ds3

Syntax

[no] ds3 [sonet-sdh-index]

Context

config>port>tdm

Description

This command enables the context to configure DS3 parameters on a 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card or a 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card.

DS3 lines carry 28 DS1 signals and a 44.736 Mb/s data rate.

If DS3 links are provisioned on a channelized SONET/SDH Adapter card, you must provision the parent STS-1 SONET/STM0 SDH path first (this requirement does not apply to the 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card).

The no form of this command disables DS3 capabilities on the specified SONET/SDH path or DS3 port. The DS3 parameters must be disabled if a clear channel is enabled by default. A clear channel uses out-of-band signaling, not in-band signaling; therefore, the entire bit rate of the channel is available.

Default

n/a

Parameters
sonet-sdh-index

specifies the components making up the specified SONET/SDH path on the 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

e1

Syntax

[no] e1 e1-id

Context

config>port>tdm

Description

This command enables the context to configure E1 parameters on a channelized 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card, 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card, 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card, 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card, or 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card (DS3 ports only). E1 is a standard WAN digital communication format designed to operate over copper facilities at a rate of 2.048 Mb/s.

Once a channel has been configured for E1, all ports on the card can only be configured for E1. There cannot be a mix of DS1 and E1 channels on the same card.

The no form of this command deletes the specified E1 channel.

Default

n/a

Parameters
e1-id

the identifier of the E1 channel

Values

E1 number (1 to 21) | e1-sonet-sdh-index

e3

Syntax

[no] e3 [sonet-sdh-index]

Context

config>port>tdm

Description

This command enables the context to configure E3 parameters on a 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card. E3 lines provide a speed of 34.368 Mb/s and are frequently used by service providers outside North America.

Default

n/a

Parameters
sonet-sdh-index

specifies the components making up the specified SONET/SDH path on the 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

encoding

Syntax

encoding {b8zs | ami}

Context

config>port>tdm

Description

This command configures the encoding for the physical DS1 (T1) port. DS1 ports can be configured for either B8ZS (bipolar with eight-zero substitution) zero code suppression or AMI (alternate mark inversion). B8ZS and AMI are line coding techniques.

This command is supported on the following cards and platforms:

  • 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 7705 SAR-A (on the variant with T1/E1 ports)

  • 7705 SAR-M (on the variants with T1/E1 ports)

Default

b8zs

length

Syntax

length {133 | 266 | 399 | 533 | 655}

Context

config>port>tdm

Description

This command configures the line length for the physical DS1 port on the 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card or 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card.

Line buildout settings must be adjusted with line length in order to ensure nominal operating voltage levels for receivers. Ideal receiver voltage levels should be < 3Vp.

Default

133

line-impedance

Syntax

line-impedance {75 | 100 | 120}

Context

config>port>tdm

Description

This command configures the line impedance of a port. Line impedance is set on a per-port basis and ports on the same card can have different values. Before changing the line impedance of a port, the port must be shut down.

Default

100 for DS1

120 for E1

Parameters
75

75 Ω

100

100 Ω

120

120 Ω

tpif

Syntax

[no] tpif

Context

config>port>tdm

Description

This command creates an IEEE C37.94 teleprotection interface (TPIF) channel.

The no form of this command deletes the port’s TPIF channel.

Default

n/a

timeslots

Syntax

timeslots timeslots

Context

config>port>tdm>tpif>channel-group

Description

This command defines the list of DS0 timeslots to be used in the TPIF channel group.

Default

1

Parameters
timeslots

specifies the number of consecutive timeslots to be associated with the channel group. The value must start from the first timeslot. It represents line bandwidth of n x 64 kb/s, where n is the number of timeslots.

Values

1 to 12

DS1 and E1 Commands

channelized

Syntax

channelized {ds1 | e1}

no channelized

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3

Description

This command configures the associated DS3 channel as a channelized DS3 with DS1/E1 sub-channels.

The no form of this command disables channelization. The sub-channels must be deleted first before the no command is executed.

Default

no channelized

Parameters
ds1

specifies that the channel is DS1

e1

specifies that the channel is E1

clock-source

Syntax

clock-source {loop-timed | node-timed | adaptive | differential}

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1

config>port>tdm>e1

Description

This command specifies the clock source to be used for the link transmit timing.

The following can be configured for loop timing and node timing:

  • T1/E1 CES circuits on the 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • T1/E1 CES circuits on the 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • T1/E1 CES circuits on the 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

  • T1/E1 CES circuits on the 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card

  • T1/E1 CES circuits on the 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card

The following can be configured for adaptive timing:

  • 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-M on T1/E1 CES circuits used for TDM pseudowires

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-X on T1/E1 CES circuits used for TDM pseudowires

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-A on T1/E1 CES circuits used for TDM pseudowires

  • T1/E1 ports on the 4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module

The following can be configured for differential timing:

  • 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • T1/E1 channels on the 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card

  • T1/E1 channels on the DS3 ports on the 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card (E3 ports cannot be channelized)

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-M

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-X

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-A

  • T1/E1 ports on the 4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module

The clock source setting also determines the node sync reference if the port is configured as one of the node sync references (config>system>sync-if-timing>{ref1 | ref2}> source-port command). Refer to the 7705 SAR Basic System Configuration Guide, ‟Node Timing”, for more information.

Note: If a timing reference from an external BITS clock is used on a dedicated T1/E1 port, the port must be configured as loop-timed.
Default

node-timed

Parameters
loop-timed

the link recovers the clock from the received data stream

node-timed

the link uses the internal clock when transmitting data

adaptive

clocking is derived from the incoming pseudowire packets from the MPLS network

differential

clocking is derived from a common clock compared to differential clock recovery (DCR) data in the RTP header in the TDM PW overhead. DCR must also be enabled on the relevant card, module, or chassis with the clock-mode command.

framing (DS1)

Syntax

framing {esf | sf | ds1-unframed}

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1

Description

This command specifies the DS1 framing to be used for the port.

The ds1-unframed parameter allows the configuration of an unstructured DS1 channel on the following:

  • 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

  • 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card

  • 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card (DS3 ports only)

  • 4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module (T1/E1 ports only)

  • 7705 SAR-M (T1/E1 ports only)
  • 7705 SAR-X (T1/E1 ports only)
  • 7705 SAR-A (T1/E1 ports only)

When an unframed DS1 channel is shut down, it sends the AIS pattern to the far-end DS1. The far end does not react to the AIS pattern if the far-end DS1 is configured as unframed. If the far-end DS1 is configured as framed, the far end declares AIS. The operational status remains up and no alarms are generated while the near end is operationally down. This is normal behavior for unframed G.703 mode.

Default

esf

Parameters
esf

configures the DS1 port for extended superframe framing

sf

configures the DS1 port for superframe framing

ds1-unframed

specifies DS1 unframed (G.703) mode for DS1 interfaces

framing (E1)

Syntax

framing {no-crc-g704 | g704 | e1-unframed}

Context

config>port>tdm>e1

Description

This command specifies the E1 framing to be used for the port.

The e1-unframed parameter allows the configuration of an unstructured E1 channel on the following:

  • 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

  • 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card

  • 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card (DS3 ports only)

  • 4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module (T1/E1 ports only)

  • 7705 SAR-M (T1/E1 ports only)
  • 7705 SAR-X (T1/E1 ports only)
  • 7705 SAR-A (T1/E1 ports only)

When an unframed E1 channel is shut down, it sends the AIS pattern to the far-end E1. The far end does not react to the AIS pattern if the far-end E1 is configured as unframed. If the far-end E1 is configured as framed, the far end declares AIS. The operational status remains up and no alarms are generated while the near end is operationally down. This is normal behavior for unframed G.703 mode.

Default

g704

Parameters
g704

configures the E1 port for G.704 framing

no-crc-g704

configures the E1 port for G.704 framing with no CRC4

e1-unframed

specifies E1 unframed (G.703) mode for E1 interfaces

hold-time

Syntax

hold-time {[up hold-time-up] [down hold-time-down]}

no hold-time

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1

config>port>tdm>e1

Description

This command configures the DS1/E1 link dampening timers in 100s of milliseconds, which guards against reporting excessive interface transitions. Once implemented, subsequent transitions of the interface from one state to another are not advertised to upper layer protocols until the configured timer has expired.

Default

no hold-time

Parameters
hold-time-up

the hold-timer for link-up event dampening. A value of zero (0) indicates that an up transition is reported immediately.

Values

0 to 100 (in 100 ms)

hold-time-down

the hold-timer for link-down event dampening. A value of zero (0) indicates that a down transition is reported immediately.

Values

0 to 100 (in 100 ms)

loopback (DS1)

Syntax

loopback {line | internal | fdl-ansi | fdl-bellcore | payload-ansi}

no loopback

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1

Description

This command puts the specified port or channel in a loopback mode.

A line loopback loops frames received on the corresponding port or channel back toward the transmit (egress) direction before reaching the framer. The bit stream is not reframed. The electrical signal is regenerated by the Tx line interface unit (LIU) and the timing is provided by the Rx LIU. On the 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card, 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card, or 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card, the traffic is also passed through to the fabric.

An internal loopback loops the frames that are coming in an egress direction from the fabric toward the framer, back to the fabric. This is usually referred to as an equipment loopback. On the 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card, 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card, or 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card, the frames are also transmitted on the line.

The fdl-ansi loopback command sends a repeating 16-bit ESF data link code word to the remote end requesting that it enter into a network line loopback. The ansi keyword enables the remote line FDL ANSI bit loopback on the T1 line, in accordance with the ANSI T1.403 specification.

The fdl-bellcore loopback command sends a repeating 16-bit ESF data link code word to the remote end requesting that it enter into a network line loopback. The bellcore keyword enables the remote line FDL Bellcore bit loopback on the T1 line, in accordance with the Bellcore TR-TSY-000312 specification.

The payload-ansi loopback command sends a repeating 16-bit ESF data link code word to the remote end requesting that it enter into a network payload loopback. A payload loopback loops frames back toward the transmit (egress) direction after reaching the framer. The bit stream is reframed. The electrical signal is regenerated by the Tx LIU and the timing is provided by the Rx LIU.

The loopback command is not saved to the system configuration.

The no form of this command disables the specified type of loopback.

Note:

  • The fdl-ansi, fdl-bellcore and payload-ansi options can only be configured if DS1 framing is set to ESF.

  • The 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card cannot initiate fdl-ansi, fdl-bellcore, or payload-ansi loopbacks.

  • The 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card supports up to 16 line loopbacks and 16 internal loopbacks at a time.

Default

no loopback

Parameters
line

places the associated port or channel into line loopback mode

internal

places the associated port or channel into internal loopback mode

fdl-ansi

requests an FDL line loopback in accordance with the ANSI T1.403 specification

fdl-bellcore

requests an FDL line loopback in accordance with the Bellcore TR-TSY-000312 specification

payload-ansi

requests a payload loopback using ANSI signaling

loopback (E1)

Syntax

loopback {line | internal}

no loopback

Context

config>port>tdm>e1

Description

This command puts the specified port or channel in a loopback mode.

A line loopback loops frames received on the corresponding port or channel back toward the transmit (egress) direction before reaching the framer. The bit stream is not reframed. The electrical signal is regenerated by the Tx line interface unit (LIU) and the timing is provided by the Rx LIU. On the 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card, 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card, or 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card, the traffic is also passed through to the fabric.

An internal loopback loops the frames that are coming in an egress direction from the fabric toward the framer, back to the fabric. This is usually referred to as an equipment loopback. On the 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card, 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card, or 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card, the frames are also transmitted on the line.

The no form of this command disables the specified type of loopback.

Note: The 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card supports up to 16 line loopbacks and 16 internal loopbacks at a time.
Default

no loopback

Parameters
line

places the associated port or channel into line loopback mode

internal

places the associated port or channel into internal loopback mode

remote-loop-respond

Syntax

[no] remote-loop-respond

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1

Description

This command configures the DS1 channel response to remote loopbacks. When enabled, the channel responds to remote loopbacks; when disabled, the channel does not respond.

Note: The 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card cannot respond to fdl-ansi, fdl-bellcore, or payload-ansi loopbacks.
Default

no remote-loop-respond

report-alarm

Syntax

[no] report-alarm {ais | los | oof | rai | looped | ber-sd | ber-sf}

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1

config>port>tdm>e1

Description

This command enables logging of DS1 or E1 alarms. When configured, logging is enabled for the raising and clearing of the specified alarms.

The no form of this command disables logging of the specified alarms.

Parameters
ais

reports alarm indication signal errors

Default

ais alarms are issued

los

reports loss of signal errors

Default

los alarms are issued

oof

reports out-of-frame errors

Default

oof alarms are not issued

rai

reports remote alarm indication signal errors

Default

rai alarms are not issued

looped

reports looped packets errors

Default

looped alarms are not issued

ber-sd

reports BER line signal degradation errors on:

  • the 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • the 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-M

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-X

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-A

  • T1/E1 ports on the 4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module

Default

line signal degradation alarms are not issued

ber-sf

reports BER line signal failure errors on:

  • the 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • the 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-M

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-X

  • T1/E1 ports on the 7705 SAR-A

  • T1/E1 ports on the 4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module

Default

line signal failure alarms are not issued

signal-mode

Syntax

signal-mode cas

no signal-mode

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1

config>port>tdm>e1

Description

This command enables or disables Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) at the port and circuit levels. When enabled, control signals (such as those for synchronizing and bounding frames) are carried in the same channels as voice and data signals.

If the signal mode for a DS1/E1 port or channel is configured for no signal-mode, all DS0/64 kb/s channels within the DS1 or E1 port will not be enabled for CAS. Individual channel groups within that DS1 or E1 port inherit this state and cannot be changed.

If the signal mode for a DS1/E1 port or channel is configured for signal-mode cas, any new channel groups default to signal-mode cas.

The signal mode must be configured for CAS before creating a Cpipe service that supports T1 or E1 with CAS. Refer to the 7705 SAR Services Guide, ‟Creating a Cpipe Service”, for information on configuring a Cpipe service.

This command is valid only on the following cards and platforms when DS1 framing is set to esf or sf, or E1 framing is set to g704 or no-crc-g704:

  • 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

  • 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card

  • 4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module

  • 7705 SAR-A

  • 7705 SAR-M

  • 7705 SAR-X

Parameters
cas

specifies channel associated signaling

ssm

Syntax

ssm

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1

config>port>tdm>e1

Description

This command accesses the context to configure DS1 or E1 Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) parameters.

Note:

  • Only g704 framing mode should be used with E1 SSM. The no-crc-g704 and e1-unframed framing modes are not compatible with E1 SSM. See the framing (E1) command for information on E1 framing.

  • Only esf framing mode should be used with DS1 SSM. See the framing (DS1) command for information on DS1 framing.

ssm-bit

Syntax

ssm-bit sa-bit

no ssm-bit

Context

config>port>tdm>e1>ssm

Description

This command configures which Sa bit in the E1 frame to use for conveying the quality level SSM information.

Default

8

Parameters
sa-bit

identifies which Sa bit to use for SSM information

Values

4 to 8

tx-dus

Syntax

[no] tx-dus

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>ssm

config>port>tdm>e1>ssm

Description

This command enables or disables the transmission of 0xF (DUS) (do not use for synchronization) in the SSM channel. The code 0xF is transmitted but it is translated to DNU (do not use) for E1 or SDH and to DUS for SONET or T1.

Default

no tx-dus

threshold

Syntax

threshold {ber-sd | ber-sf} rate threshold-rate

no threshold {ber-sd | ber-sf}

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1

config>port>tdm>e1

Description

This command configures the line signal degradation (SD) bit error rate (BER) and line signal failure (SF) thresholds.

PCV error rates are measured and when they cross either the degradation or failure threshold, alarms are raised.

The no form of this command disables the BER-SD or BER-SF feature.

Default

ber-sd - disabled

ber-sf - disabled

Parameters
threshold ber-sd

specifies the BER that specifies signal degradation

threshold ber-sf

specifies the BER that specifies signal failure

threshold-rate

specifies the number of errors, in millions

Values

1, 5, 10, 50, 100

DS1 and E1 Channel Group Commands

channel-group

Syntax

[no] channel-group channel-group-id

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1

config>port>tdm>e1

Description

This command creates n ✕ DS0 (64 kb/s) channel groups in a channelized DS1 or E1 circuit. Channel groups cannot be further subdivided.

The no form of this command deletes the specified DS1 or E1 channel group.

Default

n/a

Parameters
channel-group-id

identifies the channel group ID number

Values

DS1: 1 to 24

E1: 1 to 32

crc

Syntax

crc {16 | 32}

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

Description

This command configures the precision of the cyclic redundancy check (CRC). Non-ATM channel groups configured under DS1 or E1 support 16-bit checksum. ATM channel groups support a 32-bit checksum.

Default

16

Parameters
16

use 16-bit checksum for the associated port/channel

32

use 32-bit checksum for the associated port/channel

encap-type

Syntax

encap-type {atm | cem | ipcp | ppp-auto | frame-relay | cisco-hdlc | hdlc}

no encap-type

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

Description

This command configures the encapsulation method used for a port. This parameter can be set on both access and network ports. Adapter Cards and Platforms and Encapsulation Types in Access Mode lists the adapter cards and platforms and the corresponding encapsulation types.

For access mode, the supported encapsulation types are atm, cem, frame-relay, cisco-hdlc, hdlc, and ipcp.

Table 7. Adapter Cards and Platforms and Encapsulation Types in Access Mode

Adapter Cards and Platforms

Encapsulation Type

atm

cem

frame-relay

cisco-hdlc

hdlc

ipcp

16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

1

4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card

4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card (DS3 ports only)

4-port T1/E1 and RS-232 Combination module

7705 SAR-X

Note:

  1. Not supported on fractional T1/E1 channels

For network mode, only ppp-auto encapsulation is supported.

To change the encap-type, the channel group must first be deleted, then reconfigured with the new encap-type.

Default

no encap-type

Parameters
atm

specifies the encapsulation type as ATM for ATM pseudowires

cem

specifies the encapsulation type as circuit emulation mode (CEM) for TDM pseudowires

frame-relay

specifies the encapsulation type as frame relay

cisco-hdlc

specifies the encapsulation type as Cisco HDLC

hdlc

specifies the encapsulation type as HDLC

ipcp

specifies the encapsulation type as IPCP for a PPP/MLPPP channel group in access mode

ppp-auto

specifies the encapsulation type as PPP for PPP/MLPPP bundles in network mode

idle-cycle-flag

Syntax

idle-cycle-flag {flags | ones}

no idle-cycle-flag

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

Description

This command configures the value that the DS0, DS1, DS3, E1, or TDM interface transmits during idle cycles. This command is applicable only if the encapsulation type is ppp-auto.

The no form of this command changes the idle cycle flag to the default value.

Default

flags (0x7E)

Parameters
flags

use 0x7E as the idle cycle flag

ones

use 0xFF as the idle cycle flag

idle-payload-fill

Syntax

idle-payload-fill {all-ones | pattern pattern}

no idle-payload-fill

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

Description

This command defines the data pattern to be transmitted (8-bit value) when the circuit emulation service is not operational or temporarily experiences underrun conditions. This command is only valid for CESoPSN services.

Note: See the 7705 SAR Services Guide for information about CESoPSN services.
Default

all-ones

Parameters
all-ones

transmits 11111111

pattern

transmits the user-defined pattern

Values

0 to 255 (can be entered in decimal, binary, or hexadecimal format)

idle-signal-fill

Syntax

idle-signal-fill {all-ones | pattern pattern}

no idle-signal-fill

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

Description

This command defines the signaling pattern to be transmitted (4-bit value) when the circuit emulation service is not operational or temporarily experiences underrun conditions. This command is only valid for CES with CAS.

Note: See the 7705 SAR Services Guide for information on CESoPSN services.
Default

all-ones

Parameters
all-ones

transmits 1111

pattern

transmits the user-defined pattern

Values

0 to 15 (can be entered in decimal, binary, or hexadecimal format)

loopback

Syntax

loopback {line | internal}

no loopback

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

Description

This command puts the specified n ✕ DS0 (64 kb/s) channel group in a loopback mode. For T1 ports, the channel group can have 1 to 24 channels. For E1 ports, the channel group can have 1 to 31 channels.

When a line loopback is enabled on the channel group:

  • frames received on the channel group on the Rx port are looped back toward the Tx (egress) port before reaching the framer. However, if CAS is enabled on the interface, the Tx signaling bits will continue to be sourced from the far end of the Cpipe (not looped back).

  • an all-ones pattern is inserted by the framer in the direction of the switch fabric and to the far end of the Cpipe

When an internal loopback (usually referred to as an equipment loopback) is enabled on the channel group:

  • frames received on the channel group from the switch fabric toward the framer are looped back to the switch fabric and to the far end of the Cpipe. However, if CAS is enabled on the interface, the Rx signaling bits will continue to be sourced from the local access port (not looped back).

  • traffic received on the channel group will continue to be sent out the Tx (egress) port as if no internal loopback was there

N ✕ DS0 (64 kb/s) channel group loopbacks are only supported on the 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card and the 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card.

Default

no loopback

Parameters
line

puts the specified channel group in line loopback mode

internal

puts the specified channel group in internal loopback mode

mac

Syntax

mac ieee-address

no mac

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>ds3

Description

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an APS port. When the command is issued while the port is operational, IP will issue an ARP, if appropriate, and BPDUs are sent with the new MAC address. Configuring a MAC address using the mac command is only supported for APS channel groups. Physical channel groups do not support the mac command.

The no form of this command removes the configured MAC address. The physical port MAC address will be used instead.

For TDM ports, configuring the MAC address allows the same MAC address to be assigned to ports across two routers in an MC-APS pair for MEF 8.

The mac command is only supported on the 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card and 4-port OC3/STM1 / 1-port OC12/STM4 Adapter card.

Default

no mac

Parameters
ieee-address

specifies the 48-bit MAC address in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC, and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

mode

Syntax

mode {access | network}

no mode

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

Description

This command configures a TDM channel for access or network mode operation.

An access port or channel is used for customer-facing traffic on which services are configured. A Service Access Point (SAP) can only be configured on an access port or channel.

When a port is configured for access mode, the appropriate encap-type must be specified to distinguish the services on the port. Once a TDM channel has been configured for access mode, multiple services can be configured on the TDM channel.

A network port or channel participates in the service provider transport or infrastructure network when a network mode is selected. When the network option is configured, only the ppp-auto encap-type can be configured for the port or channel.

The no form of this command restores the default.

Default

access

Parameters
access

configures the port or channel as service access

network

configures the port or channel for transport network use

mtu

Syntax

mtu mtu-bytes

no mtu

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

Description

This command configures the maximum payload MTU size for a port.

Packets received that are larger than the MTU will be fragmented or discarded, depending on whether the DF bit is set in the packet header. If the port mode or encapsulation type is changed, the MTU assumes the default values of the new mode or encapsulation type. The default and maximum values are shown in the table below.

Table 8. Default and Maximum Port MTU

Port Type

Mode

Encap Type

Default (Bytes)

Max MTU (Bytes)

TDM (PW)

Access

cem

1514

1514

TDM (ATM PW)

Access

atm

1524

1524

TDM (FR PW)

Access

frame-relay

1514

2090

TDM (HDLC PW)

Access

hdlc

1514

2090

TDM (IW PW)

Access

cisco-hdlc

1514

2090

TDM (PPP/MLPPP)

Access

ipcp

1502

2090

TDM (PPP/MLPPP)

Network

ppp-auto

1572

2090

Serial V35 or X21 (FR PW)

Access

frame-relay

1514

2090

SONET/SDH

Access

atm

1524

1524

SONET/SDH

Network

ppp-auto

1572

2090

The no form of this command restores the default values.

Default

The default MTU value depends on the port type, mode, and encapsulation as listed in the table.

Parameters
mtu-bytes

sets the maximum allowable size of the MTU, expressed as an integer

Values

512 to 2090 bytes

ppp

Syntax

[no] ppp

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure the LCP operational parameters for a DS1 or E1 channel or a DS0 channel.

The no form of the command removes the LCP operational parameters.

Default

no ppp

ber-sf-link-down

Syntax

ber-sf-link-down

no ber-sf-link-down

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>ppp

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>ppp

Description

This command enables the channel-group down on BER-SF alarm. When enabled, the channel-group will be placed out of service once BER-SF is detected.

The no form of this command disables the feature.

Default

no ber-sf-link-down

keepalive

Syntax

keepalive time-interval [dropcount drop-count]

no keepalive

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>ppp

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>ppp

Description

This command sets the keepalive interval.

The no form of this command returns the interval to the default value.

Default

keepalive 10 dropcount 3

Parameters
time-interval

the time in seconds between keepalive messages, expressed as a decimal integer

Values

1 to 60

drop-count

the number of consecutive keepalive failed request attempts or remote replies that can be missed after which the port is operationally downed

Values

1 to 255

scramble

Syntax

[no] scramble

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

Description

This command enables payload scrambling on channel groups. The command is applicable only if the encapsulation type is atm.

signal-mode

Syntax

signal-mode cas

no signal-mode

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

Description

This command enables or disables Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) at the channel group level. When enabled, control signals (such as those for synchronizing and bounding frames) are carried in the same channels as voice and data signals.

If the signal mode at the DS1/E1 port level is configured for signal-mode cas, any new channel groups default to signal-mode cas. Any existing channel groups can be individually changed from cas to no signal-mode.

The signal mode must be configured for CAS before creating a Cpipe with CAS. Refer to the 7705 SAR Services Guide, ‟Creating a Cpipe Service”, for information on configuring a Cpipe service.

This command is valid only on the following cards and platforms when DS1 framing is set to esf or sf, or E1 framing is set to g704 or no-crc-g704:

  • 16-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 32-port T1/E1 ASAP Adapter card

  • 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card

  • 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card

  • 7705 SAR-A

  • 7705 SAR-M

  • 7705 SAR-X

Parameters
cas

specifies channel associated signaling

timeslots

Syntax

timeslots timeslots

no timeslots

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

Description

This command defines the list of DS0 timeslots to be used in the DS1 or E1 channel group. The timeslots do not need to be consecutive. If the encapsulation type is changed to or from atm, the timeslots are reset to the default. If the encapsulation type is set to atm, the timeslot ranges are automatically configured and cannot be changed.

If the port is configured for fractional T1/E1 (see Configuring Fractional T1/E1 Ports for PPP Encapsulation), this command is used to specify the number of timeslots to be used on the port. Only the specified timeslots can be used.

The no form of this command removes DS0 timeslots from a channel group.

Default

no timeslots — non-ATM channel groups

1 to 24   — channel groups configured under DS1 with atm encapsulation

2 to 16, 18 to 32 — channel groups configured under E1 with atm encapsulation

2 to 32 — channel groups configured under E1 (ppp-auto)

Parameters
timeslots

specifies the timeslots to be associated with the channel group. The value can consist of a list of timeslots. Each member of the list can either be a single timeslot or a range of timeslots.

Values

1 to 24 for DS1 interfaces. The full range is automatically configured for ATM channel groups and cannot be changed.

2 to 32 for E1 interfaces. The 2 to 16 and 18 to 32 ranges are automatically configured for ATM channel groups and cannot be changed.

DS3 and E3 Commands

clock-source

Syntax

clock-source {loop-timed | node-timed | differential | free-run}

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3

config>port>tdm>e3

Description

This command specifies the clock source to be used for the link transmit timing.

The clock source setting also determines the node sync reference if the port is configured as one of the node synchronization references (config>system>sync-if-timing>{ref1 | ref2}> source-port command). Refer to the 7705 SAR Basic System Configuration Guide, ‟Node Timing”, for more information.

Default

node-timed (for the 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card)

loop-timed (for all other applicable adapter cards)

Parameters
loop-timed

the link recovers the clock from the received data stream

node-timed

the link uses the internal clock when transmitting data (this parameter does not apply to the 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card)

differential

clocking is derived from a common clock compared to differential clock recovery (DCR) data in the RTP header in the TDM PW overhead. DCR must also be enabled on the relevant card, module, or chassis with the clock-mode command. This parameter applies only to DS3/E3 ports on the 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card.

free-run

timing source is from its own clock, not an external timing source (this parameter does not apply to the 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card)

crc

Syntax

crc {16 | 32}

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3

config>port>tdm>e3

Description

This command configures the precision of the cyclic redundancy check (CRC). Non-ATM ports support a 16-bit checksum and ATM ports support a 32-bit checksum. CRC applies to PPP applications only on the 2-port OC3/STM1 Channelized Adapter card and 4-port DS3/E3 Adapter card.

Default

16 (non-ATM ports)

32 (ATM ports)

Parameters
16

use 16-bit checksum for the associated port

32

use 32-bit checksum for the associated port

encap-type

Syntax

encap-type {atm | cem | ppp-auto | frame-relay}

no encap-type

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3

config>port>tdm>e3

Description

This command configures the encapsulation method used on the specified DS3/E3 port.

To change the encap-type, the port must first be deleted, then reconfigured with the new encap-type.

Default

no encap-type

Parameters
atm

specifies the encapsulation type as ATM

cem

specifies the encapsulation type as circuit emulation mode (CEM) for TDM pseudowires

ppp-auto

specifies the encapsulation type as PPP. The activation of IPCP and MPLSCP is automatically enabled depending on the protocol configuration. This encapsulation type is only valid on DS3 and E3 ports or DS3 channels in network mode.

frame-relay

specifies the encapsulation type as frame relay

feac-loop-respond

Syntax

[no] feac-loop-respond

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3

config>port>tdm>e3

Description

This command enables the DS3/E3 interface to respond to remote loop signals. The DS3/E3 far-end alarm and control (FEAC) signal is used to send alarm or status information from the far-end terminal back to the local terminal. DS3/E3 loopbacks at the far-end terminal from the local terminal are initiated.

The no form of this command prevents the DS3/E3 interface from responding to remote loop signals.

Default

no feac-loop-respond

framing (DS3)

Syntax

framing {c-bit | m23}

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3

Description

This command specifies DS3 framing for the associated DS3 port.

Default

c-bit

Parameters
c-bit

configures the DS3 port for C-bit framing

m23

configures the DS3 port for M23 framing

framing (E3)

Syntax

framing g751

Context

config>port>tdm>e3

Description

This command specifies E3 framing for the associated E3 port.

Default

g751 (this default cannot be changed)

Parameters
g751

configures the E3 port for g751 framing

idle-cycle-flag

Syntax

idle-cycle-flag {flags | ones}

no idle-cycle-flag

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3

config>port>tdm>e3

Description

This command configures the value that the DS3/E3 interface transmits during idle cycles. This command is applicable only if the encapsulation type is ppp-auto. For ATM ports, the configuration does not apply and only the no form is accepted.

The no form of this command resets the idle cycle flag to the default value.

Default

flags (0x7E)

no idle-cycle-flag (for ATM)

Parameters
flags

use 0x7E as the idle cycle flag

ones

use 0xFF as the idle cycle flag

loopback

Syntax

loopback {line | internal | remote}

no loopback

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3

config>port>tdm>e3

Description

This command puts the specified DS3/E3 port into a loopback mode.

A line loopback loops frames received on the corresponding port or channel back towards the transmit (egress) direction before reaching the framer.

An internal loopback loops the frames that are coming in an egress direction from the fabric towards the framer, back to the fabric. This is usually referred to as an equipment loopback.

A remote loopback sends a signal to the remote device to provide a line loopback. To configure a remote loopback, you must enable feac-loop-respond on the far-end DS3/E3 interface, then set the loopback to remote on the near-end DS3/E3 interface. Remote loopback sends a loopback code to the far-end DS3/E3 interface that results in the far end sending out a line loopback.

The loopback command is not saved to the system configuration.

The no form of this command disables loopback on the DS3/E3 port.

Default

no loopback

Parameters
line

places the associated DS3/E3 port into line loopback mode

internal

places the associated DS3/E3 port into internal loopback mode

remote

places the associated DS3/E3 port into remote loopback mode

mdl

Syntax

mdl {eic | lic | fic | unit | pfi | port | gen} mdl-string

no mdl

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3

Description

This command configures the maintenance data link (MDL) message for a DS3 port or channel. This command is only applicable if the DS3 port or channel is using C-bit framing, specified using the framing (DS3) command.

The no form of this command removes the mdl-string association and stops the transmission of MDL messages.

Default

no mdl

Parameters
mdl-string

specifies an MDL message up to 38 characters long

eic

specifies the equipment ID code up to 10 characters long

lic

specifies the line ID code up to 11 characters long

fic

specifies the frame ID code up to 10 characters long

unit

specifies the unit ID code up to 6 characters long

pfi

specifies the facility ID code up to 38 characters long

port

specifies the port ID code up to 38 characters long

gen

specifies the generator number to send in the MDL test signal message, up to 38 characters long

mdl-transmit

Syntax

[no] mdl-transmit {path | idle-signal | test-signal}

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3

Description

This command enables the transmission of an MDL message on a DS3 port or channel. This command is only applicable if the DS3 port or channel is using C-bit framing, specified using the framing (DS3) command.

The no form of this command prevents the transmission of an MDL message on the DS3 port or channel.

Default

no mdl-transmit

Parameters
path

specifies the MDL path message

idle-signal

specifies the MDL idle signal message

test-signal

specifies the MDL test signal message

mode

Syntax

mode {access | network}

no mode

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3

config>port>tdm>e3

Description

This command configures a DS3/E3 port for access or network mode of operation.

SAPs can only be configured on access ports. When a DS3/E3 port is configured for access mode, the encap-type can be set to atm, cem, or frame-relay.

A network port is used as an uplink to connect to the packet network and transport the PPP services. Network mode applies to DS3 and E3 ports. When a DS3/E3 port is configured for network mode, the encap-type must be set to ppp-auto.

The mode can be changed between access and network provided that encap-type has not been configured yet. If encap-type has been configured, the DS3/E3 port must be first deleted and then reconfigured with the required encap-type.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default

access

Parameters
access

configures the port as service access

network

configures the port as a network uplink

mtu

Syntax

mtu mtu-bytes

no mtu

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3

config>port>tdm>e3

Description

This command configures the maximum payload MTU size for a DS3/E3 port configured for PPP. Packets that are received larger than the MTU are discarded. Packets that cannot be fragmented at egress and exceed the MTU are also discarded.

The no form of this command restores the default value.

Default

1572 (for ppp-auto)

Parameters
mtu-bytes

sets the maximum allowable size of the MTU, expressed as an integer

Values

512 to 2090 (in bytes)

ppp

Syntax

ppp

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3

config>port>tdm>e3

Description

This command enables access to the context to configure the LCP operational parameters for a DS3/E3 port.

keepalive

Syntax

keepalive time-interval [dropcount drop-count]

no keepalive

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3>ppp

config>port>tdm>e3>ppp

Description

This command sets the interval between keepalive messages.

The no form of this command returns the interval to the default value.

Default

keepalive 10 dropcount 3

Parameters
time-interval

the time in seconds between keepalive messages, expressed as a decimal integer

Values

1 to 60

drop-count

the number of consecutive keepalive failed request attempts or remote replies that can be missed before the port becomes operationally down

Values

1 to 255

report-alarm

Syntax

[no] report-alarm {ais | los | oof | rai | looped}

Context

config>port>tdm>ds3

config>port>tdm>e3

Description

This command enables logging of DS3 and E3 alarms for a DS3/E3 port or channel. When configured, logging is enabled for the raising and clearing of the specified alarms.

The no form of this command disables logging of the specified alarms.

Parameters
ais

reports alarm indication signal errors

Default

ais alarms are issued

los

reports loss of signal errors

Default

los alarms are issued

oof

reports out-of-frame errors

Default

oof alarms are not issued

rai

reports remote alarm indication signal errors

Default

rai alarms are not issued

looped

reports looped packets errors

Default

looped alarms are not issued

Voice Commands

voice

Syntax

voice

Context

config>port

Description

This command enables the context to configure voice port parameters. This context can only be accessed on the 6-port E&M Adapter card, 8-port Voice & Teleprotection card, 8-port FXO Adapter card, and 6-port FXS Adapter card.

Default

n/a

audio-wires

Syntax

audio-wires {four-wires | two-wires}

Context

config>port>voice

Description

This command configures the number of audio wires to be used for audio transmission for an E&M interface.

A change in the number of audio wires may also require a change in the tlp-rx and tlp-tx values.

Default

four-wires

Parameters
four-wires

four-wire operation

two-wires

two-wire operation. This parameter is not valid if the corresponding port or channel’s signaling type is 4W transmission.

em

Syntax

[no] em

Context

config>port>voice

Description

This command enables the context to configure channel group parameters for a channelized E&M voice interface.

The no form of this command deletes the E&M channel group.

Default

n/a

fault-signaling

Syntax

fault-signaling {idle | seized}

Context

config>port>voice>em

config>port>voice>fxo

config>port>voice>fxs

Description

This command configures a voice channel for idle or seized fault signaling.

On the 6-port E&M Adapter card, this command is valid only if signaling-mode is configured for E&M signaling. The 6-port E&M Adapter card also supports configuration of the idle and seized codes.

Configuration of the idle and seized codes is not supported on the FXO and FXS channels on the 8-port Voice & Teleprotection card, or on the 8-port FXO Adapter card or 6-port FXS Adapter card. The code transmitted depends on signaling type and companding law as shown in Idle and Seized Codes for FXO and FXS Signaling Types.

Table 9. Idle and Seized Codes for FXO and FXS Signaling Types

Signaling Type

Companding Law

ABCD code

A-Law

Mu-Law

Idle

Seized

3600plar (FXS only)

1101

0101

3600plar (FXS only)

11

00

1511plar (FXS only)

1101

0101

1511profile1 (FXO, FXS)

1101

0101

3600ls (FXO, FXS)

01

11

3600re (FXO, FXS)

1101

0101

1511sn137 (FXO, FXS)

1111

0111

Default

idle

Parameters
idle

specifies idle fault signaling

seized

specifies seized fault signaling

fxo

Syntax

[no] fxo

Context

config>port>voice

Description

This command creates a Foreign Exchange Office (FXO) channel on a channelized voice interface. This command applies to the 8-port FXO Adapter card and the 8-port Voice & Teleprotection Card.

The no form of this command deletes the port’s FXO channel.

Default

n/a

fxs

Syntax

[no] fxs

Context

config>port>voice

Description

This command creates a Foreign Exchange Subscriber (FXS) channel on a channelized voice interface. This command applies to the 8-port Voice & Teleprotection card and 6-port FXS Adapter card.The no form of this command deletes the port’s FXS channel.

Default

n/a

idle-code

Syntax

idle-code abcd-code

no idle-code

Context

config>port>voice>em

Description

This command defines the ABCD signaling code to be transmitted when the voice channel is configured to transmit idle fault signaling. The command is also used for driving/scanning the E&M signaling leads.

This command is valid only on the 6-port E&M Adapter card and only if signaling-mode is configured for E&M signaling.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

0 (for Mu-Law companding)

13 (for A-Law companding)

Parameters
abcd-code

the 4-bit ABCD value to be transmitted

Values

0 to 15 (can be entered in decimal, binary, or hexadecimal format)

line-balance

Syntax

line-balance {nominal | 800}

Context

config>port>voice

Description

This command configures the line balance for the FXO or FXS voice interface on the 8-port Voice & Teleprotection card, for the FXO voice interface on the 8-port FXO Adapter card, and for the FXS voice interface on the 6-port FXS Adapter card.

Default

nominal (for both FXS and FXO)

Parameters
nominal

600 Ω

800

800 Ω//(100 Ω+50 nF)

loopback

Syntax

loopback {internal-analog | internal-digital}

no loopback

Context

config>port>voice>em

config>port>voice>fxo

config>port>voice>fxs

Description

This command puts the specified port or channel in loopback mode. The internal-digital parameter is the only valid option for FXO and FXS.

The loopback command is not saved to the system configuration between boots.

The no form of this command disables the loopback.

Default

no loopback

Parameters
internal-analog

places the associated port or channel into an internal analog loopback mode. The internal analog loopback resides in the CODEC, close to the line side. It loops the outgoing analog signals back towards the system. For E&M ports, the loopback analog signal may be looped back at a different signal level due to gain/loss circuits outside of the CODEC being bypassed.

internal-digital

places the associated port or channel into an internal digital loopback mode. The internal digital loopback resides in the CODEC, close to the system side. It loops the outgoing frames back towards the system.

ring-generation

Syntax

ring-generation {16 | 20 | 25}

no ring-generation

Context

config>port>voice

Description

This command configures the frequency of the generated ring signal for the specified FXS voice port.

This command does not apply to FXO or E&M ports.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

16

Parameters
16

16 Hz ring signal

20

20 Hz ring signal

25

25 Hz ring signal

seized-code

Syntax

seized-code abcd-code

no seized-code

Context

config>port>voice>em

Description

This command defines the ABCD signaling code to be transmitted when the channel is configured to transmit seized fault signaling. The command is also used for driving/scanning the E&M signaling leads.

This command is valid only on the 6-port E&M Adapter card and only if signaling-mode is configured for E&M signaling.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default

0 (for Mu-Law companding)

13 (for A-Law companding)

Parameters
abcd-code

the 4-bit ABCD value to be transmitted

signaling-type

Syntax

signaling-type {3600plar | 1511plar | 3600ls | 1511profile1 | 3600re | 1511sn137}

Context

config>port>voice

Description

This command configures how the signaling leads operate to establish a call. To change this parameter, the voice channel must be shut down first.

For FXO, 3600ls, 1511profile1, 3600re, and 1511sn137 are the only valid options; 1511profile1, 3600re, and 1511sn137 support A-Law companding, and 3600ls supports Mu-Law companding.

For FXS, all signaling types are supported; 3600plar supports both A-Law and Mu-Law companding, 1511plar, 1511profile1, 3600re, and 1511sn137 support A-Law companding, and 3600ls supports Mu-Law companding.

Default

3600ls (for Mu-Law companding)

3600re (for A-Law companding)

Parameters
3600plar

private line automatic ringdown

1511plar

private line automatic ringdown

3600ls

loop start

1511profile1

1511 loop start

3600re

remote extension

1511sn137

1511 profile 137

signaling-lead

Syntax

signaling-lead

Context

config>port>voice>em

Description

This command enables the context to configure the input and output leads, which carry call control signals.

Default

n/a

e

Syntax

e {high | low | end-to-end}

Context

config>port>voice>em>signaling-lead

Description

This command configures the output signaling lead known as the E-lead (Ear, Earth, or Exchange).

This command is valid only if signaling-mode is configured for E&M signaling.

Default

end-to-end

Parameters
high

specifies that the output signaling lead is forced on

low

specifies that the output signaling lead is forced off

end-to-end

specifies that the output signaling lead follows that of the remote end

m

Syntax

m {high | low | end-to-end}

Context

config>port>voice>em>signaling-lead

Description

This command configures the input signaling lead known as the M-lead (Mouth, Magneto, or Multiplexer).

This command is valid only if signaling-mode is configured for E&M signaling.

Default

end-to-end

Parameters
high

specifies that the input signaling lead is forced on

low

specifies that the input signaling lead is forced off

end-to-end

specifies that the input signaling lead follows that of the connected equipment

signaling-mode

Syntax

signaling-mode {em | transmission-only}

Context

config>port>voice>em

Description

This command configures the signaling mode for the specified port or channel. This configuration is done for groups of three ports (ports 1 to 3 and ports 4 to 6). The first port to be configured in the group sets the signaling mode for the other ports in the group. For example, if port 1 is set for transmission only, ports 2 and 3 must also be set for transmission only, and if port 4 is set for E&M signaling, ports 5 and 6 must also be set for E&M signaling. To change the signaling mode of a port, all ports in the group must first be deconfigured.

Default

em

Parameters
em

specifies E&M signaling mode

transmission-only

specifies transmission-only mode. This parameter is not valid if audio-wires is configured for two-wire operation.

tlp-rx

Syntax

tlp-rx decibels

Context

config>port>voice

Description

This command configures the analog-to-digital receive transmission level point (TLP) for the specified port.

Parameters
decibels

specifies the transmission level point expressed as an integer (in tenths)

Values

–16.0 to +7.0 (for E&M four-wires)

–10.0 to +6.0 (for E&M two-wires)

–7.0 to 0.0 (for FXO and FXS)

Default

0.0 (for E&M)

–3.0 (for FXO and FXS)

tlp-tx

Syntax

tlp-tx decibels

Context

config>port>voice

Description

This command configures the analog-to-digital transmit transmission level point (TLP) for the specified port.

Parameters
decibels

specifies the transmission level point expressed as an integer (in tenths)

Values

–16.0 to +7.0 (for E&M four-wires)

–10.0 to +6.0 (for E&M two-wires)

–4.0 to +3.0 (for FXO and FXS)

Default

0.0 (for E&M)

0.0 (for FXO and FXS)

Voice Channel Group Commands

channel-group

Syntax

[no] channel-group channel-group-id

Context

config>port>voice>em

config>port>voice>fxo

config>port>voice>fxs

Description

This command creates a DS0 channel group for a channelized E&M, FXO, or FXS voice interface.

Channel groups cannot be further subdivided.

The no form of this command deletes the specified channel group.

Default

n/a

Parameters
channel-group-id

specifies the channel group ID number

Values

1 (only a single DS0 channel group, the first one, can be configured)

encap-type

Syntax

encap-type cem

Context

config>port>voice>em>channel-group

config>port>voice>fxo>channel-group

config>port>voice>fxs>channel-group

Description

This command configures the encapsulation method used by the channel group.

Default

no encap-type

Parameters
cem

specifies the encapsulation method as circuit emulation (TDM)

mode

Syntax

mode access

Context

config>port>voice>em>channel-group

config>port>voice>fxo>channel-group

config>port>voice>fxs>channel-group

Description

This command configures a channelized voice interface for access mode operation. Network mode is not supported.

An access port or channel is used for customer-facing traffic on which services are configured. A Service Access Point (SAP) can only be configured on an access port or channel.

When a port or channel is configured for access mode, the encap-type must be specified (in this case, cem) to distinguish the services on the port.

Default

access

Parameters
access

specifies the channelized E&M, FXO, or FXS voice port as service access

LAG Commands

lag

Syntax

[no] lag lag-id

Context

config

Description

This command enables the context in which Link Aggregation Group (LAG) attributes are defined.

A LAG groups two or more Ethernet links (ports) into one logical link. The aggregation of multiple physical links adds redundancy and improves resiliency between two network devices, and allows for load sharing.

On access, network, and hybrid ports, a LAG supports active/standby and active/active operation.

For active/standby operation, the links must be in different subgroups. Links can be on the same platform or adapter card/module or distributed over multiple components. If an active link in a LAG fails, traffic gets redistributed to the standby link.

Load sharing is supported among the active links in a LAG group.

The no form of this command deletes the LAG from the configuration. A LAG can only be deleted while it is administratively shut down. Any dependencies, such as IP interface configurations, must be removed from the LAG before it can be shut down.

Default

no lag

Parameters
lag-id

the LAG identifier, expressed as a decimal integer

Values

1 to 32

access

Syntax

access

Context

config>lag

Description

This command enables the context to configure access parameters.

Default

n/a

adapt-qos

Syntax

adapt-qos {link | distribute}

Context

config>lag>access

Description

This command specifies how active/active LAG SAP queue scheduler, SAP scheduler (H-QoS), and SAP MSS scheduler QoS rates (as specified by the SLA) are distributed to each of the active LAG ports. This command applies only to access LAGs.

Default

link

Parameters
link

specifies that the full QoS rates are configured on each of the active LAG links for SAP queue schedulers, SAP schedulers (H-QoS), and SAP MSS schedulers

distribute

specifies that the QoS rates are divided equally among the active LAG links for SAP queue schedulers, SAP schedulers (H-QoS), and egress MSS schedulers. For ingress MSS shaper schedulers, the distribute parameter specifies that the QoS rates are divided proportionally among the active link MDAs based on the number of active links on each MDA.

bfd

Syntax

bfd

Context

config>lag

Description

This command creates the bfd context and enables a micro-BFD session over the associated LAG links.

Default

n/a

family

Syntax

family ipv4

Context

config>lag>bfd

Description

This command specifies the address family for the micro-BFD session over the associated LAG links.

Default

ipv4

Parameters
ipv4

specifies that IPv4 encapsulation be used for the micro-BFD session

bfd-on-distributing-only

Syntax

[no] bfd-on-distributing-only

Context

config>lag>bfd>family

Description

This command enables standardized implementation for interworking with other vendors by restricting micro-BFD sessions to links in the LACP distributing state only.

The configuration must be the same for both the local and remote LAG nodes.

The no form of this command disables restricting micro-BFD sessions; this functionality is an enhanced proprietary solution.

Default

no bfd-on-distributing-only

local-ip-address

Syntax

local-ip-address ip-address

no local-ip-address

Context

config>lag>bfd>family

Description

This command is used to specify the IPv4 address of the BFD source.

The no form of this command removes the address from the configuration.

Default

no local-ip-address

Parameters
ip-address

specifies the IPv4 address

Values

a.b.c.d

max-admin-down-time

Syntax

max-admin-down-time [[down-interval] | infinite]

no max-admin-down-time

Context

config>lag>bfd>family

Description

This command specifies the maximum length of time the router continues to forward traffic over a link after the micro-BFD session has transitioned to a down state because it received an Admin Down state message from the far end. The configured time allows the administrator to disable or deprovision the micro-BFD session on the local node before forwarding is halted over the associated links.

The configured interval must be the same for both the local and remote LAG nodes.

The no form of this command removes the time interval from the configuration.

Default

0

Parameters
down-interval

specifies the time, in seconds, that the router continues to forward traffic

Values

0 to 3600

infinite

specifies no end time to forward traffic

max-setup-time

Syntax

max-setup-time [[up-interval] | infinite]

no max-setup-time

Context

config>lag>bfd>family

Description

This command specifies the maximum length of time the router forwards traffic over a link that has transitioned from standby to active before the micro-BFD session is fully established (up state).

The configured interval must be the same for both the local and remote LAG nodes.

The no form of this command returns the timer value to the default (infinite), which indicates that the state of the micro-BFD session is ignored forever.

Note: If bfd-on-distributing-only is enabled, you cannot configure the max-setup-time to a value between 0 and 3000. Similarly, if max-setup-time is set to a value between 0 and 3000, you cannot enable bfd-on-distributing-only.
Default

infinite

Parameters
up-interval

specifies the time, in milliseconds, that the router forwards traffic

Values

–1 | 0 to 60000

infinite

specifies no end time to forward traffic

multiplier

Syntax

multiplier multiplier

no multiplier

Context

config>lag>bfd>family

Description

This command specifies the detect multiplier used for a micro-BFD session over the associated LAG links. If a BFD control packet is not received within the period specified by the multiplier x receive-interval parameter of the receive-interval command, the session is declared down.

The no form of this command removes the multiplier from the configuration.

Default

3

Parameters
multiplier

specifies the multiplier value

Values

3 to 20

receive-interval

Syntax

receive-interval receive-interval

no receive-interval

Context

config>lag>bfd>family

Description

This command specifies the receive timer used for micro-BFD sessions over the associated LAG links. The receive interval is the expected interval between received BFD control packets.

The no form of this command removes the receive timer from the configuration.

Default

100

Parameters
receive-interval

specifies the interval time, in milliseconds

Values

10 to 100000

remote-ip-address

Syntax

remote-ip-address ip-address

no remote-ip-address

Context

config>lag>bfd>family

Description

This command is used to specify the IPv4 address of the BFD destination.

The no form of this command removes the address from the configuration.

Default

no remote-ip-address

Parameters
ip-address

specifies the IPv4 address

Values

a.b.c.d

shutdown

Syntax

[no] shutdown

Context

config>lag>bfd>family

Description

This command disables micro-BFD sessions for this address family.

The no form of this command re-enables micro-BFD sessions for this address family.

Default

shutdown

transmit-interval

Syntax

transmit-interval transmit-interval

no transmit-interval

Context

config>lag>bfd>family

Description

This command specifies the transmit timer used for micro-BFD sessions over the associated LAG links. The transmit interval is the interval between transmitted BFD control packets.

The no form of this command removes the transmit timer from the configuration.

Default

100

Parameters
transmit-interval

specifies the interval time, in milliseconds

Values

10 to 100000

dynamic-cost

Syntax

[no] dynamic-cost

Context

config>lag

Description

This command enables OSPF or IS-IS costing of a LAG based on the available aggregated, operational bandwidth.

The path cost is dynamically calculated based on the interface bandwidth. OSPF path cost can be changed through the interface metric or the reference bandwidth.

If dynamic cost is configured, costing is applied based on the total number of links configured and the cost advertised is inversely proportional to the number of links available at the time. This requires that the number of links that are up exceeds the configured LAG threshold value; if the number of links that are up falls below the threshold, the configured threshold action determines whether, and at what cost, this LAG will be advertised (see port-threshold).

For example, a physical link in OSPF has a cost associated with it of 100, and the LAG consists of four physical links. The cost associated with the logical link is 25. If one link fails, the cost is automatically adjusted to 33.

If dynamic cost is not configured and OSPF auto-cost is configured, costing is applied based on the total number of links configured. This cost will remain static provided that the number of links that are up exceeds the configured LAG threshold value; if the number of links that are up falls below the threshold, the configured threshold action determines whether, and at what cost, this LAG will be advertised.

If dynamic cost is configured and OSPF auto-cost is not configured, the cost is determined by the cost configured on the OSPF metric, provided that the number of links that are up exceeds the configured LAG threshold value; if the number of links that are up falls below the threshold, the configured threshold action determines whether this LAG will be advertised.

If neither dynamic cost nor OSPF auto-cost is configured, the cost advertised is determined by the cost configured on the OSPF metric, provided that the number of links that are up exceeds the configured LAG threshold value; if the number of links that are up falls below the threshold, the configured threshold action determines whether this LAG will be advertised.

The no form of this command removes dynamic costing from the LAG.

Default

no dynamic-cost

encap-type

Syntax

encap-type {dot1q | null | qinq}

no encap-type

Context

config>lag

Description

This command configures the encapsulation method used to distinguish customer traffic on a LAG.

The encapsulation type of a LAG must match that of its member links. If the encapsulation type of the LAG is changed, the encapsulation type of all its member links also changes.

The encapsulation type can be changed on the LAG only if there is no interface or service associated with it. If the MTU is set to a non-default value, it will be reset to the default value when the encapsulation type is changed.

The no form of this command reverts to the default encapsulation type.

Default

null — all traffic on the link belongs to a single service or VLAN

Parameters
dot1q

ingress Ethernet frames carry IEEE 802.1Q tags, each tag signifying a different service

null

ingress Ethernet frames do not use any tags to indicate a service. As a result, only one service can be configured on a link with null encapsulation.

qinq

ingress frames carry two tags, where the outer tag is the service provider tag and the inner tag is the customer service tag as defined in 802.1ad

hold-time

Syntax

hold-time down hold-down-time

no hold-time

Context

config>lag

Description

This command specifies the delay between detecting that a LAG is down (all active ports are down) and reporting it to the upper layer protocols.

When a failure in a LAG is detected, it is immediately advertised to the rest of the system, but subsequent failures are not advertised to upper layers until the hold-time down interval has expired.

Specifying a hold time is especially useful in a 1:1 active/standby configuration because the time between detecting that the active link in the LAG is down and the time needed to activate the standby link is very short. The hold time prevents the LAG from being operationally down when switching between the active and standby link.

The no form of this command removes any hold time configured.

Default

no hold-time

Parameters
hold-down-time

specifies, in tenths of seconds, the hold time before a failure is reported

Values

0 to 2000

lacp

Syntax

lacp [mode] [administrative-key admin-key] [system-id system-id] [system-priority priority]

no lacp

Context

config>lag

Description

This command specifies the LACP mode of the LAG. By default, the LACP mode is not set.

Per the IEEE 802.1AX-2008 (IEEE 802.3ad) standard, the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) provides a standardized means for exchanging information between network devices using LAGs. LACP operates in two modes: passive and active. At least one partner must operate in active mode. For example, if the mode on the CE end is passive, the LACP mode on the 7705 SAR end must be active.

The no form of this command disables LACP.

Default

no lacp

Parameters
mode

specifies the mode in which LACP operates

Values

passive — starts transmitting LACP packets only after receiving packets

active — initiates the transmission of LACP packets

admin-key

specifies an administrative key value to identify the aggregation group on each port configured to use LACP. This value should be configured only in exceptional cases. If it is not specified, a random key is assigned.

Values

1 to 65535

Default

32768

system-id

the 6-byte system identifier in hexadecimal format

Values

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx

priority

the system priority

Values

0 to 65535

lacp-xmit-interval

Syntax

lacp-xmit-interval {slow | fast}

no lacp-xmit-interval

Context

config>lag

Description

This command specifies the interval signaled to the peer and tells the peer at which rate it should transmit.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

fast

Parameters
slow

transmits packets every 30 seconds

fast

transmits packets every second

lacp-xmit-stdby

Syntax

[no] lacp-xmit-stdby

Context

config>lag

Description

This command enables LACP message transmission on the standby link.

The no form of this command disables LACP message transmission on the standby link. Disable LACP message transmission on the standby link if the peer does not properly follow the IEEE 802.3ax standard regarding the LACP sync bit.

Default

lacp-xmit-stdby

mac

Syntax

mac ieee-address

no mac

Context

config>lag

Description

This command assigns a specific MAC address to the LAG.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address to the default value.

Default

a default MAC address is assigned by the system

Parameters
ieee-address

specifies the 48-bit MAC address in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC, and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

mode

Syntax

mode {access | network | hybrid}

no mode

Context

config>lag

Description

This command configures the LAG for access, network, or hybrid mode operation.

An access port is used for customer-facing traffic on which services are configured. A SAP can only be configured on an access port or channel.

A network port participates in the service provider transport or infrastructure network when network mode is selected.

A hybrid port allows a single port to operate in both access and network modes.

The no form of this command restores the default.

Default

network

Parameters
access

configures the LAG for access mode operation

network

configures the LAG for network mode operation

hybrid

configures the LAG for hybrid mode operation

port

Syntax

port port-id [port-id] [priority priority] [sub-group sub-group-id]

no port port-id

Context

config>lag

Description

This command adds ports (links) to a LAG. Multiple ports can be added in one command as long as the maximum is not exceeded. The number of links in a LAG depends on the platform or adapter card/module and the Ethernet port type.

The port configuration of the first port added to the LAG is used to compare to subsequently added ports. All ports must share the same characteristics (MTU, speed, duplex, and so on) as those of the first port; otherwise, they will not be added to the LAG.

The priority parameter sets the priority of the port, which is used by LACP. The lower the value, the higher the priority. The port with the highest priority is the primary port. If two or more ports share the same priority value, the port with the lowest port ID becomes the primary port.

Any configuration changes made to the primary port apply to all member ports of a LAG. For example, port hold-time and MTU settings can be modified directly on the primary port and will be applied to all member ports. Any configuration changes made to non-primary ports are rejected.

Note: All ports in a LAG must have autonegotiation disabled or set to limited mode (recommended setting is limited). Autonegotiation can be disabled or set to limited mode using the autonegotiate command under the config>port>ethernet context.

The no form of this command removes ports from the LAG.

Default

n/a

Parameters
port-id

specifies the physical port ID in the slot/mda/port format

priority

specifies the priority of a port

Values

1 to 65535

sub-group-id

identifies a LAG subgroup. Each port in a LAG must be a member of a subgroup. If no subgroup is specified for an access port, the configuration will fail. If no subgroup is specified for a network port, the port is assigned to subgroup 1.

Subgroups should only be configured on one side of a LAG, not both. If you configure the 7705 SAR with subgroups to handle active/standby operation, the partner system should not be configured with subgroups. Only having one side perform active/standby selection guarantees a consistent selection and fast convergence. Active/standby selection is signaled through LACP from one side of the LAG to the other.

Values

1 to 4

port-threshold

Syntax

port-threshold value [action {dynamic-cost | down}]

no port-threshold

Context

config>lag

Description

This command sets a threshold value and controls the behavior of the LAG if the number of operational links is equal to or below the threshold value.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

0 action down

Parameters
value

the number of operational links at or below which the configured action will be invoked for the LAG. When the number of operational links exceeds the port threshold value, any action taken for being below the threshold value will cease.

Values

0 to 7

action dynamic-cost

specifies that dynamic costing will be activated if the number of operational links is equal to or below the configured threshold value. The LAG will remain operationally up with a cost relative to the number of operational links. The link will only be regarded as operationally down when all links in the LAG are down.

action down

specifies that the LAG will be brought operationally down if the number of operational links is equal to or below the configured threshold value. The LAG will only be regarded as up when the number of operational links exceeds the configured threshold value.

selection-criteria

Syntax

selection-criteria [best-port | highest-count | highest-weight] [slave-to-partner] [subgroup-hold-time hold-time]

no selection-criteria

Context

config>lag

Description

This command specifies which criteria is used to select the active subgroup (link) of a LAG. Every time the configuration of a link changes, the selection algorithm is applied.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default

highest-count

Parameters
best-port

specifies that all standby ports will have their corresponding transmitters disabled. This parameter is used in static LAG configurations.

highest-count

specifies the subgroup with the highest number of eligible member links. An eligible member link of a LAG is a member that can potentially become active.

A subgroup can have a maximum of one eligible member link.

highest-weight

specifies the subgroup with the highest aggregate weight

slave-to-partner

selects, together with the selection criteria, the active subgroup. An eligible member link of a LAG is a member that can potentially become active. This means it is operationally up (not disabled) for use by the remote side. The slave-to-partner parameter can be used to control whether this latter condition is taken into account. The slave-to-partner parameter does not apply to static LAG configurations.

It is recommended that this parameter be set.

hold-time

specifies the delay time, in tenths of a second, before switching to a newly selected active subgroup from the existing active subgroup. The timer delay applies only if the existing subgroup remains operationally up. If a value of 0 or no value is specified, the switchover occurs immediately. If a value of infinite is specified, no switchover will occur as long as the subgroup remains up; this setting can be overridden with the tools>perform>force>lag-id command. LACP must be enabled on the LAG.

Values

0 to 2000 | infinite

standby-signaling

Syntax

standby-signaling [lacp | power-off]

no standby-signaling

Context

config>lag

Description

This command specifies how the state of a member port is signaled to the remote side when the status corresponding to this member port has a standby value.

The no form of this command turns off standby signaling.

Parameters
lacp

specifies that lacp is active

power-off

specifies that the standby port transmitter is disabled

Frame Relay Commands

frame-relay

Syntax

frame-relay

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>ds3

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e3

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group

Description

This command allows access to the context to configure the frame relay LMI operational parameters for a DS1/E1 channel group, a V.35 or X.21 SDI channel group, a DS-3/E-3 clear channel port, or a channelized DS3.

The no form of this command removes the frame relay LMI operational parameters.

lmi-type

Syntax

lmi-type {ansi | itu | none | rev1}

no lmi-type

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>ds3>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e3>frame-relay

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group>frame-relay

Description

This command configures the LMI type for frame relay interfaces. LMIs are sets of enhancements to the basic frame relay specification.

Default

itu

Parameters
ansi

specifies ANSI T1.617 Annex D

itu

specifies ITU-T Q933 Annex A

none

disable frame relay LMI on the port/channel

rev1

specifies Rev 1 version of ANSI T1.617 Annex D

mode

Syntax

mode {dce | dte | bidir}

no lmi-type

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>ds3>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e3>frame-relay

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group>frame-relay

Description

This command sets the frame relay interface to the DCE, DTE, or bidirectional mode of LMI operation. The DTE mode causes the router to send status enquiries over the interface. The DCE mode causes the router to respond to status enquiries. In bidirectional mode, the router performs both DTE and DCE operation over the FR interface. The bidirectional mode applies to the ANSI and ITU LMI types only.

This feature is used when two routers are connected back-to-back, running frame relay encapsulation.

Default

dce

Parameters
dce

specifies the DCE mode

dte

specifies the DTE mode

bidir

the bidirectional mode for LMI types ANSI and ITU

n391dte

Syntax

n391dte intervals

no n391dte

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>ds3>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e3>frame-relay

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group>frame-relay

Description

This command configures the DTE full status polling interval for the frame relay LMI. The number specifies the frequency at which inquiries expect a full status report.

The no form of this command returns the n391dte counter to the default value.

Default

6

Parameters
intervals

sets the number of exchanges to be done before requesting a full-status report. A value of 1 specifies to receive full-status messages only.

Values

1 to 255

n392dce

Syntax

n392dce threshold

no n392dce

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>ds3>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e3>frame-relay

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group>frame-relay

Description

This command configures the DCE error threshold for the frame relay LMI. The threshold specifies the number of errors needed to bring down a link.

The no form of this command returns the n392dce counter to the default value.

Default

3

Parameters
threshold

sets the number of errors that will put the channel in an operationally down state

Values

1 to 10

n392dte

Syntax

n392dte threshold

no n392dte

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>ds3>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e3>frame-relay

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group>frame-relay

Description

This command configures the DTE error threshold for the frame relay LMI. The threshold specifies the number of errors needed to bring down a link.

The no form of this command returns the n392dte counter to the default value.

Default

3

Parameters
threshold

sets the number of errors that will put the channel in an operationally down state

Values

1 to 10

n393dce

Syntax

n393dce count

no n393dce

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>ds3>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e3>frame-relay

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group>frame-relay

Description

This command configures the DCE monitored event count for the frame relay LMI.

The no form of this command returns the n393dce counter to the default value.

Default

4

Parameters
count

sets the diagnostic window used to verify link integrity on the DCE interface

Values

1 to 10

n393dte

Syntax

n393dte count

no n393dte

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>ds3>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e3>frame-relay

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group>frame-relay

Description

This command configures the DTE monitored event count for the frame relay LMI.

The no form of this command returns the n393dte counter to the default value.

Default

4

Parameters
count

sets the diagnostic window used to verify link integrity on the DTE interface

Values

1 to 10

t391dte

Syntax

t391dte keepalive

no t391dte

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>ds3>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e3>frame-relay

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group>frame-relay

Description

This command configures the DTE keepalive timer for the frame relay LMI.

This number specifies the interval at which the DTE sends out a keepalive response request to the DCE.

The no form of this command returns the t391dte keepalive timer to the default value.

Default

10

Parameters
keepalive

sets the interval, in seconds, between status inquiries issued by the DTE

Values

5 to 30

t392dce

Syntax

t392dce keepalive

no t392dce

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>ds3>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>tdm>e3>frame-relay

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group>frame-relay

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group>frame-relay

Description

This command configures the DCE keepalive timer for the frame relay LMI.

This number specifies the interval at which the DCE checks for keepalive responses from the DTE.

The no form of this command returns the t392dce keepalive timer to the default value.

Default

15

Parameters
keepalive

sets the expected interval, in seconds, between status inquiries issued by the DTE

Values

5 to 30

Cisco HDLC Commands

cisco-hdlc

Syntax

cisco-hdlc

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group

Description

This command enables the context to configure Cisco HDLC parameters. Cisco HDLC is an encapsulation protocol that governs information transfer. The protocol specifies a data encapsulation method on synchronous serial links using frame characters and checksums.

down-count

Syntax

down-count down-count

no down-count

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>cisco-hdlc

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>cisco-hdlc

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group>cisco-hdlc

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group>cisco-hdlc

Description

This command configures the number of keepalive intervals that must pass without receiving a keepalive packet before the link is declared down. The nodes at the two endpoints of the cHDLC link must be provisioned with the same values.

The no form of this command returns the down-count to the default value.

Default

3

Parameters
down-count

sets the number of keepalive intervals that must pass without receiving a keepalive packet before the link is declared down

Values

3 to 16

keepalive

Syntax

keepalive time-interval

no keepalive

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>cisco-hdlc

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>cisco-hdlc

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group>cisco-hdlc

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group>cisco-hdlc

Description

This command configures the interval, in seconds, used to send periodic keepalive packets. The receiver process expects to receive a keepalive packet every keepalive interval. The link is declared down if the receiver process does not receive a keepalive within the time-out interval. The link is declared up when the number of continual keepalive packets received equals the up-count. The nodes at the two endpoints of the cHDLC link must be provisioned with the same values.

The no form of this command returns the keepalive interval to the default value.

Default

10

Parameters
time-interval

sets the interval, in seconds, used to send periodic keepalive packets

Values

0 to 300. A value of 0 means no keepalive packets are sent.

up-count

Syntax

up-count up-count

no up-count

Context

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>cisco-hdlc

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>cisco-hdlc

config>port>serial>v35>channel-group>cisco-hdlc

config>port>serial>x21>channel-group>cisco-hdlc

Description

This command configures the number of continual keepalive packets that have to be received in order to declare the link up. The nodes at the two endpoints of the cHDLC link must be provisioned with the same values.

The no form of this command returns the up-count to the default value.

Default

1

Parameters
up-count

sets the number of continual keepalive packets that must be received in order to declare the link up

Values

1 to 3

SCADA Commands

scada

Syntax

scada bridge-id

Context

config

Description

This command configures a SCADA bridge on the Integrated Services card.

Parameters
bridge-id

specifies a SCADA bridge, in the format slot/mda/bridge-id where bridge-id is 1 to 16

branch

Syntax

[no] branch branch-id

Context

config>scada

Description

This command configures a branch that is used by the configured bridge.

The no form of the command deletes the specified branch.

Parameters
branch-id

the branch identifier

Values

1 to 32; branches 1 and 2 are dedicated as master branches, and branches 3 to 32 are slave branches (MDDB)

1 to 30; branches 1 and 2 are dedicated as master branches, and branches 3 to 30 are slave branches (PCM with A-Law encoding)

1 to 22; branches 1 and 2 are dedicated as master branches, and branches 3 to 22 are slave branches (PCM with Mu-Law encoding)

1 to 32; in broadcast mode, branch 1 is dedicated as the master branch (VCB with A-Law encoding)

1 to 24; in broadcast mode, branch 1 is dedicated as the master branch (VCB with Mu-Law encoding)

gain

Syntax

gain

Context

config>scada>branch

Description

This command enables the context to set gain levels for a branch.

input

Syntax

input decibels

Context

config>scada>branch>gain

Description

This command sets the input gain for the branch. The input gain defines the magnitude of the increase or decrease of the signal transmitted into the bridge.

Default

0

Parameters
decibels

number of decibels by which the transmitted signal is increased or decreased

Values

–16 to +9 dB (in 1-dB increments)

output

Syntax

output decibels

Context

config>scada>branch>gain

Description

This command sets the output gain for the branch. The output gain defines the magnitude of the increase or decrease of the signal received from the bridge.

Default

0

Parameters
decibels

number of decibels by which the received signal is increased or decreased

Values

–16 to +9 dB (in 1-dB increments)

squelch

Syntax

[no] squelch

Context

config>scada>branch

Description

This command administratively enables the squelching function for the branch. The squelching function can only be enabled on a branch if it is enabled at the bridge level (config>scada>mddb>squelch or config>scada>pcm>squelch).

The no form of this command administratively disables the squelching function on the branch.

The command does not apply to the VCB application.

Default

squelch (slave branches)

no squelch (master branches)

mddb

Syntax

mddb

Context

config>scada

Description

This command enables the context to configure MDDB parameters for a SCADA bridge.

pcm

Syntax

pcm

Context

config>scada

Description

This command enables the context to configure PCM multidrop bridge parameters for a SCADA bridge.

force-active

Syntax

force-active master branch-id

Context

config>scada>mddb

config>scada>pcm

Description

This command forces a master branch to become active. The command applies only if redundant-mode is set to manual mode.

Default

1

Parameters
branch-id

the master branch that is forced to become active

Values

1 or 2

redundant-mode

Syntax

redundant-mode redundant-mode

Context

config>scada>mddb

config>scada>pcm

Description

This command configures the redundancy mode for the master inputs of the SCADA bridge.

In manual mode, the branch must be made active manually using the force-active command in order to receive data from the master input. The bridge always broadcasts to both master branches.

In auto mode, both the master branch inputs are received simultaneously. This requires the master input behavior to be similar to an RTU, which transmits data when active and transmits either all 1s (MDDB) or no data (PCM) when inactive.

Default

manual

Parameters
redundant-mode

specifies the redundancy mode for the master inputs of the SCADA bridge

Values

manual | auto

report-alarm

Syntax

[no] report-alarm [hcmOof] [hcmRai]

Context

config>scada>mddb

Description

This command enables the logging of alarms.

The no form of the command disables the logging of alarms.

Default

no report-alarm

Parameters
hcmOof

specifies HCM out-of-frame errors

hcmRai

specifies HCM remote alarm indications

speed

Syntax

speed {600 | 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 56000}

Context

config>scada>mddb

Description

This command configures the SCADA MDDB speed for RS-232 and X.21 interfaces. SCADA MDDB is supported only at subrate speeds (less than 64 kb/s) on X.21 interfaces.

Default

2400

Parameters
600

sets the SCADA MDDB speed at 600 (supported on RS-232 interfaces only)

1200

sets the SCADA MDDB speed at 1200

2400

sets the SCADA MDDB speed at 2400

4800

sets the SCADA MDDB speed at 4800

9600

sets the SCADA MDDB speed at 9600

19200

sets the SCADA MDDB speed at 19200

38400

sets the SCADA MDDB speed at 38400

56000

sets the SCADA MDDB speed at 56000

squelch

Syntax

squelch timeout timeout

squelch reset

no squelch

Context

config>scada>mddb

config>scada>pcm

Description

This command enables the squelching function for all branches configured on a bridge. This setting takes priority over the setting at the branch level; that is, if squelch is disabled with this command, it cannot be enabled for individual branches.

The no form of this command disables the squelching function on a bridge.

Default

no squelch

Parameters
timeout

the interval between when an alarm is raised indicating that a branch has locked up and is continuing to send data to the master, and squelching is triggered

Values

1 to 120 s

reset

puts the bridge back into the normal state

squelch-recovery

Syntax

squelch-recovery [mode] [time time]

Context

config>scada>mddb

config>scada>pcm

Description

This command configures squelch recovery attributes. When the squelch-recovery mode is configured as auto, the branch will automatically be put back into the normal state after the configured time. If the branch remains locked up, the branch will automatically be squelched again.

Configuring the squelch-recovery mode as manual disables automatic squelch recovery. To put the bridge back into the normal state, use the squelch reset command.

Default

squelch-recovery manual

Parameters
mode

specifies the squelch recovery mode

Values

manual | auto

time

the interval after which the branch will automatically be put back into the normal state

Values

1 to 120 s

vcb

Syntax

vcb

Context

config>scada

Description

This command enables the context to configure voice conference bridge parameters for a SCADA bridge.

idle-code

Syntax

idle-code abcd-code

no idle-code

Context

config>scada>vcb

Description

This command defines the ABCD signaling code to be transmitted when the E&M interface is configured to transmit idle fault signaling (see fault-signaling).

The no form of the command reverts to the default value.

This command is supported only when VCB is operating in vcb-branch-initiate mode.

Default

0 (for Mu-Law companding)

13 (for A-Law companding)

Parameters
abcd-code

the 4-bit ABCD value to be transmitted

Values

0 to 15 (can be entered in decimal, binary, or hexadecimal format)

seized-code

Syntax

seized-code abcd-code

no seized-code

Context

config>scada>vcb

Description

This command defines the ABCD signaling code to be transmitted when the E&M interface is configured to transmit seized fault signaling (see fault-signaling).

The no form of the command reverts to the default value.

This command is supported only when VCB is operating in vcb-branch-initiate mode.

Default

0 (for Mu-Law companding)

13 (for A-Law companding)

Parameters
abcd-code

the 4-bit ABCD value to be transmitted

Values

0 to 15 (can be entered in decimal, binary, or hexadecimal format)